JP2019162515A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine comprising an RTC function for executing a special performance for every prescribed time, and enhanced in game amusement.SOLUTION: In a normal performance period in which a special performance is not executed, a normal first notice performance is executed as a first notice performance. In a special performance period in which a special performance is executed, a special first notice performance is executed as the first notice performance. The normal first notice performance is executed by displaying a shooting star image 300 indicating such a situation that shooting stars go from display screens 71a, 72a of left and right sub liquid crystal screens to a display screen 7a of a center main liquid crystal. On the other hand, the special first notice performance displays a character image formed of characters being prepared, on a part of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, in a mode different from that of the normal first notice performance, and displays a gauge image indicating progress of the special first notice performance on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Conventionally, game machines have been provided with production devices such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various productions are executed according to the progress of the game. Some game machines of this type have a function of executing a special effect different from a normal effect accompanying the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like. By installing a plurality of gaming machines having such functions side by side on an island facility in the gaming hall, special effects by the plurality of gaming machines can be executed simultaneously in a predetermined cycle (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

JP 2014-180295 A

  However, the function of executing a special effect every predetermined time is already well known, and merely having the function is insufficient to improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, the present invention employs the following configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of means 1 is
Identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display section in a predetermined cycle;
Production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production execution means
The suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result can be executed,
The gist is that the suggestive effect can be executed in different modes when the special effect period has not occurred and when the special effect period has occurred.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special production period that can occur at a predetermined cycle does not occur (during a period other than the special production period) and when it occurs (during the special production period), the specific display The suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of deriving the result (degree of expectation) can be executed in different modes. For this reason, it is suitable for each of the normal production period and the special production period, such as different periods of the suggested production (production contents) between the special production period (hereinafter also referred to as “normal production period”) and the special production period. For example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect in the form (effect content). As a result, it is possible to enhance the effects of both the special effect period (display of the special effect image) and the suggestion effect, thereby improving the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine of means 1 described above,
The suggestion effect is an image that can be changed in display mode, and is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting the level of the possibility on a predetermined display unit according to the display mode,
The production execution means
When performing the suggestion effect when the special effect period has not occurred, a first suggestion image is displayed on the first display unit as the suggestion image,
When executing the suggestion effect when the special effect period is occurring, the second suggestion image different from the first suggestion image is used as the suggestion image on the second display unit different from the first display unit. The gist is to display smaller than one suggestion image.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion effect is executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion image whose display mode can be changed is displayed on the first display unit. The On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special effect period, the suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion image whose display mode can be changed is displayed on the second display unit different from the first display unit, In this case, the second suggestion image is displayed smaller than the first suggestion image. For this reason, in the suggestion effect executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion image (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently to make the player pay attention to the display mode (the suggestion effect), while during the special effect period In the suggestion effect to be executed, the suggestion image (second suggestion image) is displayed conservatively so as not to impair the effect of the special effect image, and suggests the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to make a suggestion effect of an impression different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the difference.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2 described above,
The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
When the suggestion effect is executed and the high expectation effect is executed after the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestion image displayed in the suggestion effect is a predetermined display mode. The high expectation degree effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the change to
A gist of displaying a timer image indicating a lapse of the predetermined time on a predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the predetermined display mode. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a high expectation effect that suggests that the display result of the variation display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result, and the suggestion effect during the normal effect period When the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the predetermined display mode, the high expectation effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the change. Then, a timer image indicating the passage of the predetermined time is displayed on the predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the predetermined display mode. For this reason, in the normal performance period, first, the player is focused on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. When the suggestion effect is executed, the player is displayed in the display mode of the first suggestion image in the suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes a predetermined display mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timer image indicating the remaining time until the high expectation effect is executed. . As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player who is waiting for the execution (occurrence) of the high expectation effect, and improve the game entertainment when the special effect period is not occurring (during the normal effect period). It becomes possible.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 described above,
The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
When the high expectation effect is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed prior to the execution.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a high expectation effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variation display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution. It is possible. For this reason, it becomes possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the execution (occurrence) of the subsequent high expectation effect by executing the suggestion effect. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine of means 3 or 4 described above,
The effect execution means can execute the high expectation effect in the same manner when the special effect period has not occurred and when the special effect period has occurred.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high expectation degree effect can be executed in the same manner in the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, it becomes possible to make a high expectation degree effect into the same aspect (effect content) irrespective of whether the special effect period has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to make the high expectation level effect common and to make the effect easy to understand for the player.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine of means 3 or 4 described above,
The effect execution means can execute the high expectation effect in different modes depending on whether the special effect period has not occurred or when the special effect period has occurred.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high expectation degree effect can be executed in a different manner between the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, it is possible to execute a high expectation degree effect in a mode (effect content) suitable for each of the normal effect period and the special effect period. As a result, it is possible to differentiate high expectation performance and attract the player's interest to the difference.

  According to the present invention described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. It is a table | surface which shows the various random numbers which the microcomputer for game control acquires. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a reach determination table, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 standby process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 1 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 changing process. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol 2 confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a change production start process. 6 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a sub control board according to a second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process according to the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special effect related processing of Example 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the special effect (RTC effect) of Example 2, (a) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in which a preceding effect is performed, (b) is the display screen in which a main effect is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in case a special effect (RTC effect) is performed in the special game state of Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in which the normal 1st notice effect of Example 2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in which the special 1st notice effect of Example 2 is performed. 10 is a first notice effect determination table of Example 2. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of special effect related processing according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process according to the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special effect cancellation selection process of Example 4.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island facility, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via upper and lower frame hinges 56, 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Also, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that allow a player to perform a predetermined input while performing a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (These two effect buttons are collectively referred to simply as “effect button 63” or “input means”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and image display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72). Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are located in front of the front frame 51 (player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed in a slanted shape in the outward direction so as to protrude toward the outside. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are similar to the image display device 7 described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the game situation, the game effect to be executed, etc. Game production (characters, production designs, etc.), demonstration production, information related to the game (acquired game information, number of rounds, number of consecutive games, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production), Information related to the setting of the gaming machine (volume setting information, luminance setting information, etc.) is displayed. In addition, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information and may display the same information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There is a case to do. Further, the same information is displayed on any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one is different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any one or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as “image display device”.

  The image display device 7 is provided in an inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in an outer region of the game area 3. ing. As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end) is attached to the front frame 51 via a second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). It has been. For this reason, the upper and lower second image display device hinges 75 can be pivoted in the left-right direction. More specifically, it is configured to be able to turn a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) in the right direction from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because, when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, the second image display device 71 provided to protrude forward of the front frame 51 This is a configuration for preventing damage to the hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-station equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of FIG. 1) of the gaming machine 1. . On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the open end) is fixedly provided to the front frame 51 and cannot rotate.

  In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbols”) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, also referred to as an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as “effect symbol display section”). ), And the design symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the gaming state according to the gaming state (low probability low base state, high probability low base state, low probability high base state, high probability high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main player of the game. The effect symbol 8L is also referred to as “left symbol”, the effect symbol 8C is also referred to as “middle symbol”, and the effect symbol 8R is also referred to as “right symbol”.

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the gaming state is in a normal state (a low-probability low-base state described later, state A). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of game balls entering the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the special symbol success / failure determination probability (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) has a low probability (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the second special symbol variation time is the first special symbol. Is set longer (twice or more) than the fluctuation time (all deviations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in a normal state, the second special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the right game area 3B (second game area) and entering the start hole (second start port 21 or third start port 26). It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the first special symbol is variably displayed by firing a game ball in the left game area 3A (first game area) and entering the first start port 20 Has been. In other words, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is variably displayed mainly by the first special symbol (effect symbol). For this reason, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, a first special symbol display 41a ("first") described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the “special symbol display unit”) and the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”). The result of symbol change display (result of special symbol success / failure determination) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. It should be noted that any one (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”. Further, the special symbol success / failure determination is also simply referred to as “win / failure determination” or “first success / failure determination”. In addition, the control unit (main control unit 80) that performs the special symbol success / failure determination is also referred to as “a / failure determination execution unit” or “first determination / failure determination execution unit”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit symbol (Zoro eyes) such as “777” (also called “big hit symbol”). indicate. In addition, when it is a small hit (second specific hit), it is produced with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a small bonus exclusive symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit symbol”). Stop displaying symbols. In addition, when a small hit is made, the symbols in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hits symbol and the off symbol instead of the mode for displaying the small hits dedicated symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

  Also, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable, at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is stopped and displayed with a different symbol design (“out symbol” ”). Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (the result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by viewing the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. In addition, as an execution mode of the effect symbol variation display, for example, a mode in which scroll display is performed in the up and down, left and right, diagonal directions, a mode in which the effect display is performed using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and the first effect symbol display unit. In addition to 7b, there is a mode of effect display using one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a (display screen 71a) and the third effect symbol display unit 72a (display screen 72a). Moreover, in addition to this, you may have the aspect which produces an effect display only using the 2nd effect symbol display part 71a or the 3rd effect symbol display part 72a.

  Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the game effect (effect pattern game effect) using the effect symbols as described above, the game is executed in accordance with the winning game (big hit game, small hit game). A hit game effect (a big hit game effect, a small hit game effect), a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the like are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed. Although details will be described later, a game state (state A, state B or state C), a state in which a game ball is fired in the left game area 3A, or a game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b differs depending on whether or not a game is being performed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously). Such a type of game The machine is also called “simultaneous variable machine”.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a according to the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) for displaying the second effect hold 9b in accordance with the number of second special figure hold to be described later. The first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, depending on the display mode (the number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area. And the stored number of second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player. Note that the display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect to be executed (reach effect or the like). Further, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit is displayed (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the special symbol (effect symbol) that is the main depending on the gaming state). It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decoration body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined with the execution of a game effect having a relatively high possibility of winning). The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. As a result, the player enhances the gaming interest and increases the expectation of winning.

  Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on a game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined ( The first special symbol determination / first determination is performed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time.

  Above the right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 in the game area 3, a gate 28 (a normal start opening, a passing opening, an entrance, a specific start, etc.) through which a game ball can pass (can enter) (Also called mouth). A game ball entering from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down in the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is the gate 28 and the start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28 a, a normal symbol success / failure random number or the like is acquired, and when a predetermined condition (fluctuation condition) is established, The symbol symbol determination (also referred to as “normal symbol determination” or “third symbol determination”) is performed, and the normal symbol starts to be changed. After a predetermined time, the normal symbol is determined based on the result of the normal symbol determination. Stop display. When the winning ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation), and the second starting port 21 is opened. In addition, a control unit (main control unit 80) that performs normal symbol determination as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opening operation) to open the second start port 21 is referred to as “correction determination execution unit” or “ It is also referred to as “third correctness determination execution means”. The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. In other words, the sensors that detect the entry into the gate are the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, when the gate 28 (start gate 29) is passed, the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied ("big hit" Only “executable state” and “hit waiting state”). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (waiting state for big hit) is not satisfied, the control process for the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. If the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the big hit waiting state), the waiting big hit game is started and a predetermined big prize opening ( A round game in which the first grand prize opening 30) is in an open state (a state in which a player can enter a ball) is started.

  The game area 3 is a right area (right game area 3B) of the center ornament 10 and a game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is provided with a first big prize opening 30. A big winning device 31 (also referred to as “first variable entrance”) is provided. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32 and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on the top surface. When the opening / closing member 32 is closed, the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the top surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the left side to the right side in the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first big prize opening 30. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 is retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3 to thereby form an upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Disappears. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the first grand prize opening 30 enters the first big prize opening 30. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 that opens and closes the entrance of the first big prize opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game balls that have flowed down are smoothly drawn into the first large opening / closing member. While entering the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (second starting port 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the first grand prize opening 30 can enter a game ball only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the first grand prize winning device 31 (first variable entrance) is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center ornament 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30 does not change the ease of entering a game ball. A second fixed winning device 25 having a variable third start port 26 is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the third start port 26, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined ( The second special symbol determination and second determination determination) are executed, the second special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the determination result after a predetermined time. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) from the first grand prize winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), the upper game ball passage where the third start opening 26 is provided, the second start opening 31 and the second start opening 31 A lower-stage game ball passage in which two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, for example. Alternatively, it flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. In addition, since the third start opening 26 is a fixed winning device (entrance entrance) that can always enter the ball, it becomes a big hit in the left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When the game is executed in a game, it is possible to place the game ball in the third start opening 26 during the big hit game (hold) and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the big hit game ends.

  In the game area 3, the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, and the game area below (downstream) the first big winning opening 30, a variable in which the ease of entering a game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as “variable starter” or “variable starter”) having a second starter 21 of the type is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition (variation start condition) is established, whether or not the first special symbol is determined (first 1 special symbol success / failure determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination of success / failure after a predetermined time.

  The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 is a gaming ball passage whose upper surface is substantially rectangular (long plate shape). In the closed state, the movable member 23 closes the inlet of the second starting port 21 and A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed in an inclined shape from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side in the drawing). Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21, It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

  In addition, the movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second start port 21. Thereby, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the inlet portion of the second start port 21 enters the second start port 21. Thus, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening and closing member similar to the opening and closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened) The ball smoothly enters the second starting port 21 and flows down in the closed state (when closed) to allow the game ball to flow in an arbitrary direction (a second large winning port 35 to be described later) by an inclined upper surface passage. To guide.

  Thus, in a state where a game ball is launched into the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variably displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, in a state where a game ball is fired in the right region (right game region 3B) and a game is played (right-handed game), a game state (state B: low probability) in which the game is mainly performed with the variable display of the first special symbol. A base state, a high-accuracy high-base state) and a game state (state C: high-accuracy low-base state) in which a game is played mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Further, in the game area 3, which is the right area (right game area 3 </ b> B) of the center decorative body 10, the game area below (downstream) the second start port 21 is provided with a second big prize opening 35. A big winning device 36 (also referred to as “second variable entrance”) is provided. The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens / closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular shape (long plate shape) on its upper surface. In the closed state, the opening / closing member 37 closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 and opens / closes the opening / closing member 37. A game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from the right side to the left side of the drawing). Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second big prize opening 35. And then flow downward in the gaming area.

  Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 is retracted in the back direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The open / close member 37 that has been removed disappears from the entrance of the second big prize opening 35. Thereby, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down to the entrance of the second grand prize opening 35 enters the second big prize opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens and closes the entrance of the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second grand prize winning opening 35, and in the closed state (when closed), the game ball that has flowed down is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. Note that the second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second big prize winning device 36 (second variable entrance) is configured to open and close the open / close member 37 so that the game ball cannot enter and the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change to a ball ready state (open state).

  Further, in the game area below the left area (left game area 3A) of the center decorative body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) of general entrances 27 are provided. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In this pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 by left-handed. In other words, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly composed of a left-handed ball entering the first starting port 20 (first special symbol success / failure determination).

  On the other hand, if a big hit is made in the win determination (first special symbol win determination) based on entering the first starting port 20, the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) are finished (low high accuracy base state, high accuracy) In the high base state or the high accuracy low base state), entering the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35 by right-handed. A game aimed at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in the left-handed game, first, a big-hit standby state is entered, and a right-handed game aiming at entering the gate 28 is obtained. Next, when the player enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit waiting state, the big hit game starts, and the right hit game is aimed mainly at the first big winning opening 30.

  When the big hit game is finished and the game state after the big hit game is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state (state B), mainly to the gate 28 (normal gate) and the second start port 21. It is a right-handed game that aims to enter. On the other hand, when the big hit game is finished and the gaming state after the big hit game is in the high probability low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming to enter the third starting opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. In other words, the low-accuracy base state and the high-accuracy base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly consisting of entering the second starting port 21 by right-handed (first special symbol success / failure determination). The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game whose main subject is a ball entering the third starting port 26 (second special symbol determination). Thereby, even if it is the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of special symbol success / failure determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

  In the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game balls flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 in the right game area 3B The amount is adjustable (can be reduced). That is, the second out port 34b is installed upstream of all the entrances installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b are used to It is possible to adjust the rate of entry (ingress rate) of game balls into the installation area. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second big winning port 35 which is a big winning port for small hits. Is provided. By this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of game balls into the game area on the side of the second big winning port 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entering the second big winning port 35 during the small hit game. Adjustable. A game nail provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c can adjust the rate of entry of the game ball (entry rate) into the second big prize port 35.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first major winning port 30, the second major winning port 35, and the general winning port 27, the respective starting ports A predetermined number of game balls (also called “prize balls” or “game profit”) are paid out (given). In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out (the amount of game profit) based on the entrance to the first big prize opening 30 is the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the entrance to the second big prize opening 35. Set more than the number (amount of gaming profit). Specifically, the first grand prize opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one entry, and the second big prize opening 35 has 10 pieces for one entry. The prize ball is to be paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) that displays the normal symbol (also referred to as “specific identification information”) in a variable manner and stops display. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination has been won, the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination. When the result is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the game status indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the shooting direction of the game ball, that is, the right A firing direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether it should be hit or left. The main indicator 40 includes a variation state indicator 49 that indicates the variation state (c1) of the first special symbol, the variation state (c2) of the second special symbol, and the variation state (c3) of the normal symbol. Yes. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the game ball entering the third start port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped (derived) is used to display the first start port 20 and the second start port. 21 or the result of the determination on the basis of the ball entering the third starting port 26 (special symbol determination on determination, jackpot lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. When the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the special special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 and / or the second big prize opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is 15R first big hit, the three LEDs “ijn” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. About the stop display mode, similarly to the first special symbol display device 41b, different display modes are set according to the result (big hit, small hit, miss) of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before derivation display), the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, in a predetermined order from left to right. It can be set as the aspect which each LED lights so that light may flow repeatedly.

  Thus, each of the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b is composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and the first special symbol display 41a is displayed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When a plurality of LEDs corresponding to 1 are turned on (flashing) in a predetermined order and the variation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is determined as a jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), A small hit type (one mode if one type) and a stop type (one mode if one type) are stopped and displayed.

  The variation state indicator 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3). The display unit c1 indicates the variation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit The variation state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the variation state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display part c1 which shows the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display part) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display part, indicator) than the first special symbol indicator 41a. Has been. Then, the first special symbol is displayed in a blinking manner during the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed, the display is stopped in a display manner corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is made by turning off the light, and in the case of big hit, the stop display is made by lighting all red regardless of the type of the big hit. When the change display of the first special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display section c1 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is lit yellow when the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the off symbol is stopped. Is turned off (not displayed). As a result, by viewing the display unit c1 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the first special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the first special symbol display device 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c1) functions as the second first special symbol display device 41a. “Interruption of fluctuation display” is a process that can be performed when the result of the determination of whether or not the other special symbol (second special symbol) to be executed at the same time is a big hit. Then, after the release condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

  Moreover, the display part c2 which shows the fluctuation | variation state of a 2nd special symbol is one LED (display part, indicator) which is fewer LED than the 2nd special symbol display 41b similarly to the display part c1. Display section). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, it blinks, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the second special symbol determination. Specifically, when it is off, it is stopped and displayed by turning off the light. When it is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed with all red lights regardless of the big hit type. When it is a small hit, all lights are green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Press to stop display. When the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted (temporarily stopped), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display part c2 is blinked during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the big hit symbol is stopped, and the small hit symbol is stopped. The inside is displayed in green, and is off (not displayed) while the off symbol is stopped. As a result, by viewing the display part c2 of the variation state indicator 49, it is possible to grasp the variation state of the second special symbol (during variation, interruption, stop, determination result). Moreover, since the fluctuation state display device 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of display devices is smaller) than the second special symbol display device 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type and the like in detail. Can be easily grasped. Moreover, the fluctuation state display device 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display device 41b.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state symbol” or “first sub-symbol”. Further, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as “first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as “second state symbol” or “second sub-symbol”. Moreover, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as “second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as“ confirmation symbol ”)”. In addition, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and stop display of the second special symbol. Display fluctuation and stop. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination of the first special symbol is out, the first state symbol is stopped and displayed by turning off (disappearing mode), and in the case of a big hit, all red lights (regardless of the big hit type) Press to stop display. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is the same.

  Moreover, the display part c3 which shows the fluctuation state of a normal symbol is 1 LED (display part) which is fewer LEDs (display part, indicator) than the normal symbol display 42 similarly to the display part c1. It is configured. During normal symbol variation display, it blinks, and when the regular symbol variation time has elapsed, it is stopped and displayed in a display mode corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. Specifically, in the case of losing, the stop display is performed by turning off the light, and in the case of winning, the stop display is performed by lighting in red regardless of the type of the contact. In addition, when the change display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

  Accordingly, the display unit c3 is blinked during normal symbol variation display, is lit yellow when the variation display is interrupted, is lit red when the symbol symbol is stopped, and is extinguished when the off symbol symbol is stopped. (Hidden). Thus, by viewing the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49, it becomes possible to grasp the fluctuation state of the normal symbol (fluctuating, interrupting, stopping, whether or not it is determined whether or not it is correct). In addition, since the fluctuation state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators) is smaller than that of the normal symbol indicator 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type and the like in detail, but the fluctuation state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display part c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49 is also referred to as “first state normal symbol” or “first sub-normal symbol”. In addition, the first state normal symbol is subjected to variable display and stop display corresponding to the normal symbol variable display and stop display. Accordingly, when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is determined to be off, the display is stopped with a light extinction (disappearance mode).

  In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a fluctuation state indicator 49 are provided, and the fluctuation state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs that can grasp the fluctuation state in detail fails (breakage, disconnection, etc.) However, it is possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state by the fluctuation state indicator 49. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the fluctuation state display 49. In this embodiment, the main control unit controls display of both the special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b) and the fluctuation state display 49.

  Here, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (big hit or small hit) among the stop display modes (display result of the variable display) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is referred to as a “hit mode”. ”,“ Specific mode ”,“ specific display mode ”or“ specific display result ”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is“ out of mode ”or“ non-specific mode ” , Also referred to as “non-specific display mode” or “non-specific display result”. In addition, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit is also referred to as “big hit mode” or “big hit symbol”, and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit. This is also referred to as “small hit mode” or “small hit pattern”. Furthermore, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. Also referred to as “variation display means” or “identification information display means”.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various kinds of random numbers for determining whether or not a special symbol is appropriate based on the received ball Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special figure storage is stored as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as “first acquisition information”). If the information is stored in the part 85a and acquired based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, the information is stored in the second special figure reservation storage part 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as “second acquisition information”). Is done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. The digestion of the special symbol hold means that the special symbol determination random number or the like corresponding to the special symbol hold is determined, and the special symbol variable display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entrance That is, during the execution of variable display of each special symbol, or during the execution of a special game based on any special symbol success / failure determination, the special symbol success / failure determination with respect to the entry is made up to a predetermined number (four each). Can be reserved (held).

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”. Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is performed based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”) that opens the second start port 21 in an open pattern according to the current gaming state. Also called). Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). In addition, when the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol in a state where only the LED of t is lit, such as “s □ t ■”, is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed over a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

  When there is a game ball passing to the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquisition information”) such as a random number for normal symbol determination based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map hold in a general map hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, that is, during the normal symbol variation display or during the execution of the auxiliary game Can reserve (hold) the right to determine whether or not to accept a normal symbol for the passage of a predetermined number as an upper limit.

  The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44. Specifically, the universal map hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of “qr”, and displays the number of universal map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a main control board 80 ("main control unit" and "main control unit") that performs control related to gaming profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. (Also referred to as “game control unit”), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, “sub-control unit”, or “effect control unit”) for performing control related to effects executed as the game progresses, game balls A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a “payout control unit”) for performing control related to payout, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect indicator 102, a third effect hold indicator 103a, And an image control board 100 (image control unit) that performs display control of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing a main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case storing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case storing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. Is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure storage unit 85 (the first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b) and the general figure storage unit 86. .

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first big prize port sensor 30a, and a second. A big winning opening sensor 35a and a general winning opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26 a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second big prize opening sensor 35a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first big prize winning solenoid 33, and a second big prize winning solenoid 38 are connected. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big prize winning device 31. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, A figure hold display 44, a change state display 49, a round display 45, a game state display 46, a firing direction display 47, and a hit display 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 for paying out a prize ball or a rental ball and a card unit 135, and the launching device 112 via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually the left side of FIG. 1), and the inserted prepaid card (game) when the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation. It is possible to lend a ball based on information stored in a value storage medium).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 is Detect the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Based on the command received from the main control board 80, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is connected to the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100. Display of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, the third image display device 72, the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b. Let control take place. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, holding symbols, etc.) Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is made up of two LEDs, one of which displays the change display and the stop display in accordance with the change display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the change display of the second special symbol. In addition, the display mode shows the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the special symbol success / failure determination) by lighting / extinguishing the corresponding LED or the color according to the stop display. Press to stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are each composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on and off the two LEDs, or a combination of colors, the third effect on-hold display 103a is displayed on the hold number displayed on the first effect on-hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. The fourth effect hold indicator 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display region 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The

  The character design is displayed on a part or substantially the whole of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect design display portion) to display the display screen 7a (effect design display). A part or almost all of the part) may be in a state where a part or all of the effect design 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d cannot be visually recognized. is there. Even in such a covering state, these effect indicators 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on are supplementarily so that it is possible to reliably confirm the change display and stop display of the effect symbols, the number of holds, etc. And the 4th production reservation display 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display forms of the effect display device 102, the third effect hold display device 103a, and the fourth effect hold display device 103b are in a state that can be always viewed without being obstructed by the operation of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. In addition, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Note that the movable decorative member 14 is only partially visible in FIG. 1, but is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “driving data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

  Next, a description will be given of the control related to the special symbol success / failure determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, it has “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. The jackpot symbol (specific display result) is determined in advance according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, in the case of “out”, the “out of symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. If it is determined that the game is a big win or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big winning port 30 or the second big winning port 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed in a stopped state. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is called a “small hit game”.

  There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol success / failure determination. That is, depending on whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination result is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, or another specific result, etc. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profits that can be acquired by the special game differs, or the game state after the special game ends. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are “15R (round) first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “15R first big hit” “5 big hits”, “2R 6 big hits”, and “2R 7 big hits”. In “15R first big hit” and “15R fifth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is 15. In addition, in “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, and “4R fourth big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is four. In “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is two. Thus, in the big hit, all the first big prize opening 30 is opened, and the second big prize opening 35 is not opened. Accordingly, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as “big winning big winning opening (big winning variable winning opening)”.

  In addition, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “15R fifth big hit”, and “2R sixth big hit” Then, the state is shifted to a high probability state described later (actual change function is activated). Therefore, these five types of big hits are also called “probable big hits (high probability big hits)”. This high probability state (probability changing function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit” shift the gaming state after the big hit game to a low probability state described later (the probability changing function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of big hits are also referred to as “low probability big hits (low probability big hits, normal big hits)”.

  In addition, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” and “15R fifth big hit” are “second special symbol short time” which sets the variation time of the second special symbol to a short time after the big hit game ends. "Function" is activated and the high base generation function is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state (state C). This highly accurate low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than the low accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, and high accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, the variation time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is out of place is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, the playability of the high probability low base state (state C) will be described later. A ball is entered into the mouth 26. Then, it is a period during which it is possible to increase the number of game balls during the period between the previous jackpot and the next jackpot (between the jackpots) by performing the second special symbol win / fail determination. In addition, by frequently making small hits in the high probability low base state between the big hits, it is possible to expect a large number of game balls to be acquired in a short time by the small hits. In other words, it is a period that is advantageous for the player and is a period in which the gaming interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, “4R 4th big hit” and “2R 7th big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time shortening function, the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol time function is shorter than when the first special symbol time shortening function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. Thereby, the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a low-accuracy base state. In the case of “4R fourth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, the low-accuracy base state ends when the next big hit occurs or when the special symbol variation display is executed 100 times. . When the special symbol variation display is terminated 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the low-accuracy base state, the right-hand game is performed in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above. This is a period in which a game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

  In addition, “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit” activate the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” after the big hit game ends. Since the second special symbol time shortening function is not activated, the variation time of the second special symbol is set longer than the variation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate and high base state. In the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, the “first special symbol time reduction function” and the “high base generation function” continue until the next big hit occurs. Further, as described above, the “probability changing function” continues until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of “4R third big hit” and “2R sixth big hit”, after the big hit game is finished, the high-accuracy base state (the first special symbol short time state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

  In the high-accuracy base state, as in the low-accuracy base state, by making a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol success / failure determination is performed, and the game is anticipated for the next big hit. As described above, the high probability low base state is a period of time for performing a second special symbol success / failure determination by right-handed game, and frequently playing small hits, so that many game balls can be played in a short time by small hits. This is an advantageous period for players who can expect to win. Note that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and low base state than game balls that can be acquired in the highly accurate and high base state.

  In addition, a highly accurate base state after the big hit game (4R third big hit game) related to “4R third big hit game” and a low rate after the big hit game (4R fourth big hit game) related to “4R fourth big hit game” are reached. By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) in the certain base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate and high base state or low probability and high base state) is not notified (is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of jackpot was “4R 3rd jackpot”, the high-accuracy and high-base state continued even after the special symbol fluctuation display was passed 100 times, resulting in “4R 4th jackpot”. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest. In the low-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy base state, that is, the high base state, the player does not reduce the number of possessed balls very much (in a state where the decrease rate of the possessed balls is slower than the low-accuracy low base state). It can be performed.

  Similarly, after the end of the big hit game (2R sixth big hit game) related to “2R sixth big hit game” and the end of the big hit game (2R seventh big hit game) related to “2R seventh big hit game” It is difficult to recognize which game state the player has by executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character design, reach effect, etc.) To do. As shown in FIG. 9, with these gaming states as state B, the variation pattern is determined using a common variation pattern determination table. As a result, both gaming states are set to the non-notifying state in which the gaming state (highly accurate and high base state or low probability and high base state) is not notified (is difficult to recognize).

  When the type of jackpot is “2R sixth jackpot”, the high-accuracy and base state continued even after the special symbol change display has passed 100 times, and it was “2R seventh jackpot”. In this case, after the special symbol variation display has passed 100 times, the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays a game with the expectation that the highly accurate and high base state will continue even after 100 times have elapsed, and enhances the gaming interest.

  Here, the big hits of “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit” and “2R seventh big hit”, which are big hits in which the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the state B, respectively. The symbol is also referred to as “first specific display result”, and “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, and “15R fifth big hit”, which are the big hits after the big hit game is set to the state C. Each of the jackpot symbols is also referred to as a “second specific display result”.

  In addition, as for the small hits that may occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the number of times of opening the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is six times, and once (and The total (open) time is also set short. Specifically, a total of 1.8 seconds is released with 6 times of 0.3 seconds. Therefore, the number of game balls that can be acquired in one small hit game is set in comparison with the big hit game (for example, 15R first big hit game, 4R fourth big hit game, etc.). However, by generating a small hit a plurality of times (a large number of times) in a highly accurate and low base state between the big hits, a plurality of small hit games can be executed and more game balls can be acquired. Further, in the small hit, all the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the first big prize opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second big winning opening 35 is also referred to as “small winning big winning opening (variable winning opening for small winning)”. Note that, in the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times of opening the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds but simply called the number of times of opening. Also, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the gaming state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it will be in a high probability state after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs If the game state is a low probability state, the low probability state is set even after the small hit game is over. Similarly, the time reduction function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not operated based on the occurrence of the small hit.

  In addition, the probability of allocating to each big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) judgment is 20% for 15R first big hit, 10% for 4R second big hit, 35% for 4R third big hit, and 4R first big hit. The 4 big hits are 35%. On the other hand, the big hit in the determination of success / failure of the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is 50% for 15R fifth big hit, 15% for 2R sixth big hit, and 35% for 2R seventh big hit. In other words, if the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol success / failure judgment) based on the ball entering the third start port 26 whose fluctuation frequency has been improved by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function described later, It becomes a big hit (15R fifth big hit), and it becomes possible to acquire a large amount of game balls in a short time. As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, rather than being a big hit in a win / fail determination (first special symbol win / fail determination) performed by entering a game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. It is more likely for the player to win a large number of hits (second special symbol win / no-go determination) when a game ball enters the 3 start opening 26 is more advantageous. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays a game in anticipation of the occurrence of a high-accuracy and low-base state in which a game ball can be increased by a small hit along with the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “special symbol success / failure determination random number (also referred to as“ correction determination information ”)”. The determination of the type of jackpot is based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ design determining random number ”or“ symbol determining information ”). The result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol success / failure random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the balls entering the first start port 20, the second start port 21 or the third start port 26 include special design success / failure determination random numbers and jackpot type determination random numbers. In addition, there is “variation pattern random number (also referred to as“ variation pattern information ”)”. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The normal symbol success / failure determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol success / failure determination). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the second start port 21 are in an activated state or not. There are a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of the operating states. A state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “high probability state”, and a state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as a “low probability state”. In the high probability state (hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination is higher than in the low probability state (hit probability: 1/315). In other words, in the low-probability state, the jackpot determination table for the low-probability state is used to determine whether or not it is hit. A determination is made using the table (see FIG. 8A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (big hit probability) is referred to as “probability setting means”.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion of the special figure hold is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, since the length of the variation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantage / disadvantage of the player, it is set as “second special symbol time shortening function” as shown in FIG. Yes. State A (low probability low base state) and state B (low probability high base state) shown in FIG. 9 are the states in which the second special symbol short-time function is not activated, that is, the state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player plays a right-handed game and enters a game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is determined. Is displayed fluctuating. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such state) (Also referred to as “first condition state”). In addition, since it is a low base state (1st game state), the ball entering into the 2nd starting port 21 is impossible or difficult.

  Therefore, even if a right-handed game is performed in state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is progressed in the left-handed game aiming at the first start port 20 in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of executing the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display simultaneously (in parallel). Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable special symbol display to end. The first special symbol can be variably displayed.

  On the other hand, in state B (low-accuracy high-base state, high-accuracy high-base state), a right-handed game is performed because the high-base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time reduction function are operating. Thus, it is possible to enter both the second start port 21 and the third start port 26 that have been opened. In the state B, like the state A, the second special symbol time reduction function is not activated. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed and the second special symbol is variably displayed. However, the variation time of the second special symbol is very long. Since it is set to (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds, small hit 1000 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol determination is executed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, the first special symbol time reduction function is set by the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, and the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

  Further, as a state mainly based on the second special symbol success / failure determination, state C (highly accurate low base state) shown in FIG. 9 is provided. In state C (highly accurate low base state), the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, so it is possible to play a game aiming to enter the third starting port 26 by playing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third start port 26, the second special symbol determination is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Also, the second special symbol short-time state is set by the operation of the second special symbol short-time function, and the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed more frequently than in the state A and the state B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can do. Thereby, it is possible to execute the second special symbol success / failure determination which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination.

  In the state C, when the ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, the first special symbol determination is performed and the first special symbol is variably displayed. Since the variation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (out of 600 seconds, big hit 110 seconds), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even when the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 has entered the ball or when there is a holding memory related to the first special symbol success / failure determination, the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol success / failure determination is executed as much as possible.

  In this way, both state B and state C are states in which a right-handed game is performed, but in state B, as in state C, the gaming state is performed mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination, and state C Then, it is set as the game state which makes a 2nd special symbol success / failure determination as a subject. As a result, in the so-called consecutive game period (right-handed state) after a shift to right-handed game in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, the first special symbol propriety determination The game state is diversified by transitioning between a game state in which the subject is the main and the game state in which the second special symbol determination is main. In addition, the game state in which the first special symbol success / failure determination is the main and the game state in which the second special symbol success / failure determination is the main have different types of possible big hits (big hit games). While the game continues, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of the gaming state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming bored and enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, when the second special symbol time reduction function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (this state is also referred to as “second condition state”), as shown in FIG. Since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, the player can play the game smoothly without reducing the number of balls compared to the left-handed game. 2 special symbol variable games) can be executed. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol time-shortening function is not activated during the period in which the second special symbol time-shortening function is operating (the variation time of the first special symbol time-saving function is longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time reduction function may be activated. Further, it is assumed that the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased in the state B and increases in the state C.

  The probability variation function and the variation time reduction function (first special symbol time shortening function or second special symbol time shortening function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate simultaneously. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the high base generation function. In other words, the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of normal symbols operate in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy Does not operate in the low base state. Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the low base state (also referred to as a “normal high probability state”). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (per hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger for the state B than the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). The normal symbol hit / fail determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 8C). In other words, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the normal symbol becomes a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) becomes higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the high base state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to release The second start port is in an open state during the period of operation. In addition, when the result of the normal symbol win / reject determination becomes a win in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). . Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening and closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the opening operation number may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be opened once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be opened three times for 2.0 seconds. Alternatively, the opening operation in the high base state may be opened six times in 1.0 second, and may be more than the number of opening times in the low base state. In such a case, it is also said that the function of increasing the number of opening times of the variable winning device 22 operates.

  In the high base state, the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated in the high base state, compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. The period during which the second start port 21 is open becomes longer (the open time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination increases. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls.

  In addition, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In the present embodiment, the opening mode of the second start port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol variation, the normal symbol variation time starts when the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state. The time is set to such an extent that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is opened while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the opened state. In addition, in order to prevent a game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing through the upper surface of the movable member 23, a material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used as a game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

  Thereby, the game ball flow speed on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to a speed slower than the game rapid flow or the speed of the game ball passage on the front side. In addition, as an aspect for reducing the flow-down speed, in addition, an inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibiting member (protrusion or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. In addition, thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 in the high base state does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning port. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if the second big prize opening 35 is opened (a state in which a ball can be entered) due to a small hit, the game ball that has flowed down enters the second start port 21 and the second It is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35. Further, the third out port 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning port 35 from entering the second large winning port 35.

  In the high base state, not all the functions described above may operate. That is, the second start port is activated by the operation of at least one of the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 than when the function is not activated. It is only necessary that 21 is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since it is more advantageous for the player to determine whether or not the second special symbol is correct than to determine whether or not the first special symbol is correct, the player uses the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol may be variably displayed without being variably displayed. That is, even in the normal state (low probability low base state), there is a possibility of trying to play a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the variation time (average variation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the variation time (average variation time) of the first special symbol. Therefore, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed in the normal state (even if the ball enters the third starting port 26), it cannot be variably displayed many times, and the gaming efficiency is very high. It is bad. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol variably by left-handed game than to variably display the second special symbol by right-handed game. Here, “the state in which the first special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the first special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. ". In addition, “the state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)” means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of holds of the second special symbol is “0”. It means that.

  Further, in the high base state such as the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, the frequency at which the second start port 21 is opened is improved, and the first special symbol time-shortening function is used to change the first special symbol variation time. This shortens the game time and improves the game efficiency of right-handed games. In such a case, the game can proceed more advantageously if the right-handed game is performed and the first special symbol determination is made, rather than the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate.

  Further, in the highly accurate low base state, the second special symbol time-shortening function shortens the second special symbol variation time, and the game efficiency by right-handed gaming is improved. In such a case, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol determination that is advantageous to the player. Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), and is executed based on the entrance to the second start port 21. The variation time of the first special symbol is changed over a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). In addition, in the highly accurate and low base state, since the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open time extending function of the variable winning device 22 are not activated, the entry to the second start port 21 is not performed. The sphere frequency is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, the prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as the high base state. However, instead of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the small hits with a high probability (small hit probability: 420/630) prevent the game balls from decreasing during the big hits, but rather make frequent hits. It is also possible to increase the holding ball by (multiple occurrences).

  In other words, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), by entering the second start port 21 frequently by right-handed games, the ball enters the second start port 21 The winning of the next big hit is aimed at by the first special symbol success / failure determination without greatly reducing the holding ball. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entrance to the second start opening 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, The sphere does not increase (is maintained). Further, in this embodiment, since it is set so that about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls enter the second start opening 21, the high base is set unless another entrance is entered. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the specification is such that the ball is slightly reduced. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the entrance rate of the game balls into the second start port 21.

  On the other hand, in the high probability low base state, the right hit game causes a small hit to occur at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol success / failure determination based on the ball entering the third starting port 26, and the high probability. While trying to increase the number of balls in the small hit game during the low base state, the second special symbol success / failure determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol success / failure determination, aims to generate the next big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in the highly accurate and low base state, the longer the period during which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period of the high probability and low base state continues), the more small hits occur. There will be more opportunities (to play a small hit game), which will be advantageous to the player.

[Description of board configuration and game state]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), there are various entrances from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first grand prize opening 30, and the second game area. 2. The starting port 21 and the second winning port 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow path in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when these winning holes are closed, about 90% of the game balls launched into the right game area 3B are about 90%. , Passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows into the second second winning opening 35. The upper and lower opening / closing members 37 are made to flow down to the out port 34. And if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, it enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back of the game board, and the entered gaming ball is placed in the gaming area downstream from it. It has a composition that does not exist. Further, the remaining 10% not flowing into the gate 28 enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged out of the gaming machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

  By arranging the gate 28 in the most upstream position, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball is prevented from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. Further, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes “0” and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream in the right game area, almost all game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not other winning holes are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the entry to other winning holes.

  When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low-accuracy base state, high-accuracy base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second start port 21 is opened. Is done. In the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability per normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (after 1 second), the movable member 23 operates to open the second start port 21. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol success / failure determination is executed and the normal symbol is variably displayed, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21 before the game ball reaches the entrance. 2 The start port 21 is opened. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also opened once for 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. Then, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds (1 second closing → 6 .. Opening for 0 seconds-> Closing for 1 second-> Opening for about 6.0 seconds->)).

  Therefore, when a right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second start port 21 is almost open, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second start port 21. You will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second start port 21, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed. In the first special symbol success / failure determination, in the highly accurate base state, a big hit is made with a probability of 1/63, a small hit is not generated, and it is lost with a probability of 62/63.

  First, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is unsuccessful, most (about 70 to 80%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B pass through the gate 28 and are in the open state. And the other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching before the second start port 21 and flow down to the second start port 21 without flowing down to the third start port 21. 26 enters the ball or flows into the outlet 34. Thereby, the first special symbol success / failure determination is executed continuously (at a high frequency). In addition, since one winning ball is discharged by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease rate of the holding ball is reduced and the first special symbol determination is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one winning ball is also discharged by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

  Next, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the first big winning port 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. . Further, the second big prize winning port 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball flowing down by the right-handed game can smoothly enter the first big winning opening without being blocked by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream of the first big winning port 30, the game shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is also in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the game can be opened, a game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game has entered the second start port 21 first, and has not entered the second start port 21. Only the player enters the second grand prize opening 30.

  Moreover, since there is only one winning ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21, the execution time of the big hit game is simply prolonged, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant, and does not proceed smoothly, and there is a risk that the game interest will be reduced. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 upstream of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. It should be noted that since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may also prevent the entry to the second start opening 21 when not in the big hit game. Absent.

  Next, the highly accurate low base state will be described. The highly accurate low base state is a low base state, but since the variation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to advance the game by right-handed. When a right-handed game is performed in the highly accurate low base state, first, a determination is made as to whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol determination). In the low base state (highly accurate low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a long time (3 seconds) compared to the high base state, and the probability per normal symbol is also low compared to the high base state Since (1/240) is set, after the game ball has passed through the gate, after a short time (after 3 seconds), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second start port 21 is opened. It becomes a state. Since the probability of winning is set to 1/240, it is almost out of place, and the possibility that the second start port 21 is in the open state is low. In addition, instead of such a mode, the probability of winning in the normal symbol success / failure determination in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all may be outliers. In this way, the second start port 21 is not opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

  That is, in the highly accurate and low base state, the probability that the second start port 21 is in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the second start port 21 entrance becomes the second start port 21. The possibility of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second big prize opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. In addition, the possibility that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a small hit is different in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination has no small hit, and the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit.

  The game ball that flows down the first big prize opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is branched into the third starting port 26 side passage and the second starting port 21 side passage by the branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the third start port 26 side passage enters the third start port 26, the second special symbol determination is performed. In addition, in the highly accurate low base state, even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, it is unlikely that the second start port 21 will be in the open state. All flows down to the second big winning port 35 and the third out port 34c provided downstream of the second starting port 21 without entering the second starting port 21.

  In addition, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning port 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is In the small opening / closing mode shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the second starting port 21 side passage passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state and flows down to the second big winning port 35 and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big prize opening 35.

  The prize balls based on the entrance to the second grand prize opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, and therefore enter the second big prize opening 35 during the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to increase the holding ball during the highly accurate low base state. In addition, since the high-accuracy low base state continues at least until the next big hit is generated by the special symbol success / failure determination, the player may increase the ball as the high-accuracy low base state continues for a long period of time. It becomes possible. In the high-accuracy and high-base state, the second special symbol short-time state and the first special symbol variation time are set to a long time (first special symbol long-time state). Is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol success / failure determination. In the present embodiment, on average, about 20 prize balls (two entered balls) can be obtained by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (multiple times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 in ten times). Also, as a total winning ball of the “renso” period in which the right-handed game is continued, in addition to the winning ball of the big hit game, the acquired ball of the small hit game can be added, and a larger amount of gaming balls can be acquired. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, the second big winning port 35 arranged downstream of the gate 28, the first big winning port 30 for big hit (dedicated to big hit) and the second starting port 21 (the most downstream of these) is for small hit ( It is considered as a big prize opening. In addition, the second large winning opening 35, which is a small winning large winning opening, is arranged downstream of the second starting opening 21, so that the opening of the second starting opening 21 (opening / closing control) causes a second large winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second start port 21 (the time to be in the open state, the variation time of the normal symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol determination), the high base state ( The possibility of a game ball entering the second large winning opening 35 is higher in the high-accuracy and low-base state than in the low-accuracy and high-base state). Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second large winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting port 21 (without entering the ball), 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the start port 21 is made more effective.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the second start port 21 is configured to be hardly opened in the low-accuracy base state where a small hit game can occur (it may be configured not to be opened at all), the small hit It is difficult to adjust the rate of entering the second big winning opening 35 when a game is generated by entering the second starting port 21. In view of this, by providing a third out port 34c between the second starting port 21 and the second large winning port 35, and making it possible to adjust the rate of entering the third out port 34c, the second large winning a prize is obtained. The entrance rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

  In addition, even if it is the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 and the ball is almost maintained (including slight increase or decrease) (or the rate of decrease of the ball is suppressed). However, a state where a game is played in the expectation that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (an advantageous big hit) (a high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the third starting port 26 to make a small A game state (high probability low) with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while entering the second big prize opening 35 at the time of winning and increasing the holding ball Base state), and diversify gameplay. This also makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest. It should be noted that for the player, the gaming state is more advantageous in the high-accuracy and low-base state in which the holding ball can be increased than in the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low-accuracy high-base state or high-accuracy high-base state) and a high-accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the entertainment amusement.

  In addition, the start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28, and is provided at the most upstream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the big hit waiting state is established, the second starting port 21 or the like does not block the passage to the start gate 29, and allows the game ball to pass through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing to start the big hit game. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In this case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28. It is necessary to provide upstream from the 2 start port 21, the 3rd start port 26, and the second big prize opening 35.

  In addition, when a right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner to notify that the game should be fired to the right game area. Further, when the left game is to be played, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left game area should be fired. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 includes two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by turning on the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit, such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, production symbol) is performed is “low probability low base state”, “high probability low base state”, “ It is possible to control either “low accuracy high base state” or “high accuracy high base state”. Of these, the low accuracy low base state is also referred to as “normal gaming state”, and the high accuracy low base state is It is also called “specific game state”.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial setting, for example, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter Perform a reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special 1” or “first special”, and the second special symbol is “special”. 2 ”and“ second special drawing ”.

  Subsequent to the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of 4 msec, for example. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is finished and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in an output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a third start port sensor 26a) that are mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1. The detection signals detected by the first grand prize opening sensor 30a, the second big prize opening sensor 35a, the general ball opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored as prize ball information in the output buffer of the RAM. Further, a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting the fullness of the extra ball receiving tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also fetched and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as lower plate full data.

  Next, normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started). Thereby, randomness is given to the acquired values of various random numbers.

  Following normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S203), starting port sensor detection processing (S204), starting ball entry processing (S205), ordinary diagram motion processing (S206), special symbol 1 motion processing (S207) ), Special figure 2 operation processing (S208), reserved ball number processing (S209), and power-off monitoring processing (S210). Thereafter, other various processes (S211) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of normal symbol holding balls, specifically, the counter for counting the number of holding the general symbol holding in the RAM) It is determined whether or not (value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If it is determined in S302 that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the number of stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. And proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label -TRND-H, Fig. 7 (B)) of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the symbol is normal is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. Then, the obtained random number value (acquired information, universal figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general figure reservation storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Determine (S305). If it is determined in S305 that no game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 hold balls (the number of first special figure hold, specifically, In step S306, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), 1 is added to the number of stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and special figure 1 related random numbers are acquired. Processing is performed (S308), and the process proceeds to S309.

  In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM, the jackpot type determination random number The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (the random number value shown in FIG. 7A), and these acquired random values (acquisition information, special information) The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reservation balls in the first special figure storage unit 85a.

  In S309, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). If it is determined in S309 that no game ball has entered the third start port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 holding balls (the number of second special figure holdings, specifically the main control) It is determined whether or not the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). If it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S310), "1" is added to the number of stored special figure 2 reserved balls (S311), and special figure 2 relations A random number acquisition process is performed (S312), and the process ends.

  In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (Label-TRND-AS), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (Label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number) and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in the second figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at start-up]
Next, the start ball entry process (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start-and-coming process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the starting and entering ball process (S205), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S315). If it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

  In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, the value of the random number counter for special symbol success / failure determination (the random number for special symbol success / failure determination) among the acquired random number values read out is a big hit according to the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) It is determined whether or not it is off (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (preliminary determination) in S317 is a preliminary determination (so-called “hold prefetching”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not the big hit is made) is performed prior to the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is determined in the processing shown in FIG. ]).

  It should be noted that the prior determination as to whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8A), that is, a jackpot determination table for a high probability state if it is a high probability state, a normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. In addition, as another prior determination mode, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination and the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether it is a big hit, a big hit type, a game effect with a high big hit reliability, or the like.

  Next, in S318, game information (preliminary determination information) related to the determination result in S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct matches the jackpot determination value (jackpot information), Information indicating the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (random number for jackpot type determination) (hit type information), information indicating whether the special symbol success / failure determination random number value matches the jackpot determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (fluctuation pattern random number value) and the like are generated as a special figure 2 starting ball entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 may be transmitted to the sub control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information, etc.) may be transmitted.

  In addition, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, whether the information is related to the big hit, which is the type of the big hit, The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the special figure 2 acquisition random number acquired becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start ball entering command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  For the purpose of preventing fraud, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is determined is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S316, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit value) Command data including information indicating the type determination random number value) and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random value) and information indicating the result of the prior determination is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command. Can be set.

  Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S319). If it is determined that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the special figure 1 number of reserved balls has not increased (NO in S319), the process is terminated as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S321), A prior determination is made for the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special FIG. 1 start entering command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). Note that the prior determination (holding prefetching) in S322 is performed prior to the determination of the success / failure in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process described later.

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a normal operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start and entry process (S205). In the normal drawing operation process (S206), the processing related to the normal symbol display device 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . If the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and if the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401) NO, YES in S403), normal symbol change processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (NO in S401, S403, YES in S405), the normal symbol is fixed Processing (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), normal electric accessory processing (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of held balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501). If it is determined that “0” is determined in S501 (YES in S501), the processing Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in S501 that it is not “0” (NO in S501), a normal symbol success / failure determination process described later is performed (S502), and then a normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the gaming state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select the symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is the low base state (states A and C), the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), a normal symbol random number shift process (to be described later) is performed (S504), then a normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process ends. In the normal symbol variation start process (S505), the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
Next, the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol success / failure determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (a low probability high base state or a high probability high base state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S602), the state B table (the hit determination) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the winning is based on the high-probability normalization determination based on the value “0” to “238”) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is not ON, that is, it is determined that the low base state is set (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the low-probability normal / failure determination based on the table (the hit determination value is “0” to “119”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning (per normal map) is determined in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per display to be stopped (per symbol in the general pattern) is determined (S607), and the per-normal symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Next, the normal symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved storage in the ordinary figure storage area, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary figure storage area is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
Next, the normal symbol changing process (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), it is first determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has elapsed (S801), and if it is determined that it has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol movement status is set to “3” (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at a display result (a hit normal symbol or a missing normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for normal symbol success / failure determination is performed (S804), and the processing ends.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
Next, the normal symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If it is determined that the usual figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is then determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). If it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), an opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as an opening pattern for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is an opening pattern that repeats opening for 1.8 seconds three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is opened as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). A pattern is set (S906), and the process proceeds to S904. The opening pattern for state A and state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which 0.9 seconds are opened three times as described above. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-common-use flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If it is determined that the normal flag end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port is not open (NO in S1002), it is then determined whether or not it is time to open the second start port 21 (S1003). If determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second start port (YES in S1003), control for opening the second start port is executed (S1004), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S1002 that the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), whether or not it is time to close the second start port 21 (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened) Whether or not a predetermined opening time has elapsed is determined (S1005). If it is determined that it is not the closing timing of the second start port (NO in S1005), the process ends. If it is determined in S1005 that the second start port is closed (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed) (S1006), and the value of the second start port open counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

  In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is “0” (S1008). If it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the release counter is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the base map end flag is set ( S1010), the process ends. The second start port opening counter becomes “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times in the state B (high base state). In the state C (low base state), when the second start port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per map is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has ended. Then, the usual figure end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned OFF (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) following the normal operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize apparatus (the first big prize apparatus 31 and the second big prize apparatus 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. If “Special figure 1 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), special symbol 1 standby processing is performed (S1102), and “Special figure 1 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), perform special symbol 1 fluctuation processing (S1104), and if “Special figure 1 operation status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105) ), Special symbol 1 confirmation processing (S1106) is performed, and when “Special figure 1 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory processing 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the processing ends. The special figure 1 operation status is “1” in the initial setting. In addition, since the small bonus is not set as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the special electric accessory processing 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small bonus is set as a result of the first special symbol successful / bad determination. May be. In this case, when the “special figure 1 operation status” is “5”, the special electric accessory processing 2 as the small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 waiting process]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of retained balls (that is, the number of retained balls in Special Figure 1) at the first start port 20 is “0” (S1201). If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “0”, that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry to the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in game (S1207). If it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is playing a game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not playing (NO in S1207), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a customer-waiting demo screen). (S1208). If it is determined that the standby screen is displayed (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not displayed (NO in S1208), standby screen setting processing for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not “0”, that is, there is at least one random number counter value acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (in S1201) NO), special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) to be described later. Here, “Special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not playing” means that special figure 2 is not in a variable display (including a fixed stop display time) and the special figure 2 holding ball number is “0”. Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Decision Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), first, the determination value is stored in the lowest area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol adequacy determination random number counter (labeled-TRND-A) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (S1602). If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when one of the special symbols is executing the variable display related to the big hit, in the determination of whether the other special symbol is successful or not, it is not determined whether or not it is a big hit. It is either off (that is, it is not determined to be a big hit). In addition, since it does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol success / failure determination, when the second special symbol is executing the variable display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination executed during that time is: Everything is off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol does not execute the fluctuation display related to the big hit (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability change flag is ON, that is, It is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (S1603). In S1603, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the big hit determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the big hit determination table (FIG. 8A) Based on the table (the big hit determination values are “3” and “397”), the determination is made (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S1603), the success / failure determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “5”, “7”, “311”, “313”, “317”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”.

  In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is “big hit” (S1606). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8B (S1608), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609), FIG. 1 The big hit fluctuation flag is set to ON (S1610), and the process is terminated. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. Further, when it is determined that the first special symbol (Special Figure 1) is a big hit, any one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. . If it is determined that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is a big hit, one of 15R fifth big hit, 2R sixth big hit, and 2R seventh big hit is executed (see FIG. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1604, S1605) is not “big hit” (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off symbol is determined (S1607), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit fluctuation flag, the first special big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the big hit (the fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped). And a second big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a fluctuation display related to the big hit (fluctuation display in which the big hit symbol is stopped), and the main control unit 80 A flag corresponding to the big hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. In addition, as the small hit variation flag, a second small hit variation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing a variation display related to the small hit (a variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped). The flag corresponding to the small hit fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. When the big hit fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the big hit is being displayed), in the other special symbol winning / no-going determination, processing for determining whether or not the big hit is made is performed. Not performed. In other words, control is not performed in which both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress the gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), after the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203), a special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is state A (whether or not it is a low probability low base state) (S1701). If it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON. If it is determined (YES in S1702), the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referenced with reference to the state A big hit table (the portion corresponding to state A and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on (S1703). If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of variation time is selected by the state A big hit table.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is then determined whether the number of reserved balls (reserved number) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). If it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number detachment table (state A in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 1 and 2), the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

  Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (see FIG. 9, a variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “3” or “4”, the variation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is “1” or “2”. There is a high probability that a variation pattern will be selected. In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. Thereby, the function of the shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average variation time is shortened.

  If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low probability low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) Is determined (S1708). If it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), it is then determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and if the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1709) S1709: YES), referring to the state B big hit table (the portion corresponding to state B and big hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), the fluctuation is based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label -TRND-T1) Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. If it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B departure table (the portion corresponding to state B and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, the variation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

  If it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low probability high base state, high probability high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high probability low base state) (NO in S1708) Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S1712), and if it is decided that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C big hit table (see FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the variation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. If it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C departure table (the portion corresponding to state C and out of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is terminated. In other processing (S1704), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is one level lower (for example, the first special figure storage unit 85a is made up of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , The address “0000” side) (S1802). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol 1 changing process]
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special diagram 1 (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process proceeds to S1903. In S1903, a special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process proceeds to S1904.

  Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). If it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B variation counter) that counts the number of special symbol variations executed during state B (high base state) 1 is subtracted (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is “0” (S1906). If it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is “0” (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned OFF (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if the low-accuracy high-base state is entered, the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state) is entered. In the high-accuracy base state, “10000” is set in the state B counter. Therefore, even if the counter is subtracted for each change, the value of the state B counter is substantially “0”. Absent. That is, the highly accurate base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

  In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to “3” (S1908), and the special symbol fluctuation display is stopped according to the result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and jackpot type determination random number determination result. The process is performed (S1909), and the process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
As shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is displaying the fluctuation when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily interrupting the measurement of the variation time of the special symbol 1 and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game ends. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the success / failure determination process or the variable display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902), it is first determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901). If it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), then, FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to the special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). If it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to special figure 2 is being executed It is determined whether or not (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game according to special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process is terminated. And the fluctuation display of special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902) and if it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), the special figure 1 The interruption flag is set to ON (S2903), the measurement of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is interrupted (S2904), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the fluctuation display of special figure 1 can be interrupted temporarily.

  If it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, it is already determined that the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). If it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), it is then decided whether or not the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (S2906). If it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned OFF. (S2907), the measurement of the special figure 1 variation time is restarted (S2908), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the change display (time measurement of change time) of the 1st special symbol which was interrupted can be restarted.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, a special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and a second special symbol are displayed. A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the variable display is interrupted, and a flag corresponding to interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 Is set (stored).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag indicating that the big hit fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002). The special figure 1 big hit flag indicating execution of the big hit game related to the special symbol is turned on (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. Thereby, in FIG. 1, it can be shown that the fluctuation display related to the big hit is ended (the big hit is confirmed) and the game is shifted to the big hit game.

  In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that it is 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round, “15” is set to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times of one round (from opening to closing of the big prize opening) (S2005), and a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006) ), The special figure 1 operation status is set to "4" (S2007), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not 15R big hit (NO in S2004), since the big hit type is 4R big hit, “4” is set to the value of the round counter (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol that is variably displayed. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can recognize that the special symbol variation display has been completed. As a result, a big hit standby state is established. Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither big hit game nor small hit game starts, that is, because it is a fluctuation display related to a loss, the special figure 1 operation status Is set to “1” (S2009), and the process ends.

  Here, in the first embodiment, as the big hit flag, a special figure 1 big hit flag ("first big hit flag" indicating that the result of the success / failure determination related to the first special symbol becomes a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. And a special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as a "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the success / failure determination relating to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When a big hit game is executed, a big hit flag corresponding to the big hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag ("small hit flag") indicating that the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is determined is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When a small hit game is executed, a small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

  Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is reached, a display mode such as “2RΔ4R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off) is displayed. Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process (S211) shown in FIGS. Since the processing is performed in the same flow as in S206), the following description is simplified.

[Special Figure 2 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the first special symbol reservation and the digestion of the second special symbol retention ("change display of the first special symbol and change display of the second special symbol", "determination of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol) The success / failure determination and “)” can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the determination of success / failure based on the entry to the second start opening (second special symbol success / failure determination) is more appropriate to the determination of the success / failure based on the entrance to the first start opening (first special symbol success / failure). Is more likely to be a big hit (a larger amount of profits can be acquired) for the player than the (determination) (FIG. 8B).

  As shown in FIG. 30, similar to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. “Special figure 2 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each stage. If “Special figure 2 operation status” is “1” (YES in S1151), special symbol 2 standby processing (S1152) is performed, and “Special figure 2 operation status” is “2”. (NO in S1151, YES in S1153), perform special symbol 2 fluctuation processing (S1154), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “3” (NO in S1151 and S1153, YES in S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156), and if “Special figure 2 operation status” is “4” (NO in S1151, S1153, S1155, YES in S1157), special electric as a big hit game When the special treatment 1 (S1108) is performed and the "Special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (S1151, S1153, S1155, S1157 are all NO), the special electric bonus treatment as a small hit game 2 (S1109) is performed. Note that the special figure 2 operation status is "1" in the initial setting. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

  Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211). Only the special figure 2 operation process (S211) is performed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute the change display of the first special symbol and the change display of the second special symbol in parallel. This is because it is impossible to execute in parallel with the jackpot game related to 2 special symbols (only one of them can be executed). In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, but as another aspect, the result of the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol are not executable in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
The special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowermost area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure determination random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol success / failure determination It is determined whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). If it is determined in S1305 that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), a small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is terminated. The other processes are the same as those in the special figure 1 determination processing (S1203).

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1254), the process (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the second special symbol, referring to the column corresponding to the second special symbol of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9, based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). To select the variation pattern. In addition, since the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination has a small hit, if it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, a variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the gaming state.

  In state C, the game is performed mainly based on the change display of the second special symbol (second special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in state C, the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is more than the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the variation pattern of various times (various game effects can be executed) is selected. It is possible. In addition, the variation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the variation time of the second special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the state A and the state B, the game is performed mainly by the change display of the first special symbol (first special symbol success / failure determination). Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more variation patterns (variation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and the various special effects (various game effects can be obtained). A feasible variation pattern can be selected. Therefore, in the state A and the state B, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (the number of types is small). Further, the variation time of the second special symbol is configured to be longer than the variation time of the first special symbol, thereby reducing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol.

  In addition, since the state A and the state B are gaming states in which the game is performed mainly with the first special symbol variation display, the second special symbol variation time shortening function is inactivated, and the second special symbol variation time is It is set long. Specifically, in the state A and the state B, when the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds when the result of the success / failure determination is a big hit. (P12 or P20). This is set to a variation time shorter than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit in the state A. In state B, the variation time is set to be shorter than the longest variation time set as the variation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit.

  In states A and B, the second special symbol success / failure determination is not the main / failure determination, but if a too long variation time is set, the player who performed the success / failure determination for the big hit must execute it. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, when the result of the determination is a big hit, instead of setting a long time variation time unnecessarily, the variation time (the longest one) set in the first special symbol as the subject Set a shorter variation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, a fluctuation time that the player can stand by is set, and the player is disadvantaged such that the profit due to the big hit that is earned cannot be obtained. Absent. Further, since the possibility of generating a big hit is low and the profit obtained is large, such control is performed.

  In the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is a small hit, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. Of the variable display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in the states A and B, when the result of determining whether or not the second special symbol is successful is a small hit, the variable display time is longer than when the big hit and missed. Set.

  Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the success / failure determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, if there is a situation where small hits can occur frequently, the malicious player performs the second special symbol success / failure determination in spite of being in a gaming state mainly based on the first special symbol success / failure determination. There is a risk that game profits may be obtained by small hits. For example, there is a possibility that a game profit may be unfairly obtained due to an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed. In order to prevent such a situation, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination that is not the subject is a small hit, by setting the fluctuation time to a long time (longest time), Prevents frequent occurrence of small hits (small hit games). In addition, since there are not so many gaming profits that can be acquired by one small hit game, the player who generated the small hit does not cause much damage.

  Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a longer variation time than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in state A. Further, the variation time is set to be longer than the longest variation time that can be set for the first special symbol that is the main component in the state B. In addition, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol which is not the subject in the states A and B is shorter than the case where the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the fluctuation display time is longer than that when the big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is out of place, by setting the variation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and in the gaming state in which the left-handed game should be performed The player is prevented from playing inappropriate games such as right-handed games. As another embodiment, the big hit and miss may be the same variation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds or both may be 600 seconds).

  In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, other processing (S1404) is performed, and this processing is completed. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special figure 2 random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure holding storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure holding fourth (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2" and a special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the RAM output buffer to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. To do.

[Special symbol 2 changing process]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is performed in the same flow (S1951 to S1959) as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Suspension Processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 performs the processes (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29 (S2051 to S2067). Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is different from the big hit type (round counter setting process) and the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different as shown in FIG.

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, a jackpot game start process to be described later is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2102). If it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the big hit start flag is ON (YES in S2102), it is next determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the big hit start flag is a flag that is turned on when the player launches a game ball to the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball to the start gate 29 in the big hit standby state. . After the special symbol is confirmed and stopped with the big hit symbol and the big hit is made, the big ball start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the big hit game proceeds (round game starts). Here, after the big hit, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29, the gaming machine is maintained in the big hit standby state where the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave the seat and take a rest such as a toilet, drinks, and telephone. Then, after the end of the break, it is possible to advance the big hit game by firing the game ball at any timing of the player and passing the game ball through the start gate 29. The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (first big winning device 31) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game.

  If it is determined in S2103 that the big hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and is determined not to be open. If it is (NO in S2104), is it time to open the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, has it reached the time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Alternatively, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and the time for starting the next round (next release) has come (S2105). If it is determined in S2105 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is the time to start the round (YES in S2105), a round start command is set (S2106), a special winning opening release process is performed (S2107), and the process ends. Thereby, the 1st big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (refer to Drawing 6) according to the kind of jackpot.

  If it is determined in S2104 that the grand prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is being opened (YES in S2104), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening in the round is the maximum number of balls that are specified (this implementation) In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the prescribed number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30), that is, the big prize opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening of (S2112). If it is determined in S2112 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls has been reached (10) (YES in S2111), or if it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has elapsed (YES in S2112), That is, when it is determined that one of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2115), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2115), a jackpot ending command is set as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game (S2116), and the jackpot ending period Is started (S2117), the big hit end flag is turned ON (S2118), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in S2105 that the big hit end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is next determined whether or not the big hit ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the big hit end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the big hit flag is turned off (S2122). Then, the big hit start flag is turned OFF (S2123), special figure operation status setting processing 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the processing is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the big hit start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 is not yet passed in the big hit standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (S2102). Transition to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2156. . In other words, during execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned OFF before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

  If it is determined in S2152 that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning the probability variation flag OFF. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate (S2156). If it is determined that the game has passed through the start gate (YES in S2156), a big hit game is started (round game is opened). The big hit start flag is set to ON (S2157), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the vehicle has not passed through the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine is continued in the big hit waiting state. If it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot game has already been started (S2151), the process ends. Thereby, the player can start (promote) the big hit game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game state setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the big hit game that has ended this time is related to a probable big hit (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, 15R fifth big hit, 4R sixth big hit are probable big hits. In S2201, these big hit games are It is determined whether any of the five types is applicable. If it is determined that it is a probable big hit (S2201: YES), the probability change flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 4R sixth big hit. It is determined whether or not there is (S2203).

  In S2203, when it is determined that the finished big hit game is either 4R third big hit or 4R sixth big hit (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state B counter is set to “10000”. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state is set up to 10000 times at the maximum after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is established. The special symbol fluctuation display cannot be executed 10,000 times during the business day of the amusement store, so setting the state B counter to “10000” effectively generates the next big hit. This means that the high base state (state B) is continued. It should be noted that the control may be performed after setting the number of times such as “10000” times in the state B to maintain the high base state (state) until the next big hit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished big hit game is neither 4R third big hit or 4R sixth big hit (NO in S2203), that is, the finished big hit game is 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, Alternatively, if it is determined that it is one of the 15R fifth big hits (NO in S2203), the processing is ended while the state B flag remains OFF. Thereby, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game becomes a highly accurate low base state.

  In S2201, if it is determined that it is not a probable big hit, that is, a low probability big hit (low probability big hit, normal big hit) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the state B counter “100” is set (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the high base state is set 100 times after the big hit game ends, and the low probability high base state is obtained.

  The game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the game state setting process (S2121) functions as “game state control means”.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the operation is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned OFF (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 big hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON, that is, the big hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), The special figure 2 big hit flag is turned off (S3004), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3005), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), it is first determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning device (second big winning device 36) has ended in the small hit game. If it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not it is time to open the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35), that is, the opening time per unit has elapsed Then, it is determined whether or not the time for starting the first opening operation has been reached, or the time for the interval between the plurality of times of opening has elapsed and the time for starting the next opening operation has been reached (S2303). . As for the small hit game, regardless of passing the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time elapses after the fixed stop symbol is displayed. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big prize opening (YES in S2303), the second big prize opening 35 is opened according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). Finish. If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during six opening operations, that is, six times It is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have entered in the opening operation has reached the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined in S2306 that the specified number of balls has not been reached (10) (NO in S2306), whether or not it is time to close the big prize opening, that is, the predetermined prize is opened after the big prize opening is opened. It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). If it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the special winning opening has not elapsed (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the grand prize opening during the six opening operations has reached the prescribed number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the big prize opening (second grand prize) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big prize opening has elapsed (YES in S2307), the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hitting opening counter is set. It is decremented by 1 (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (S2310). If it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hitting release counter is not “0” (NO in S2310), the processing is ended as it is to start the next release operation.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit release counter is “0” (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end process in S2311. In S2311, as a small hit end process to end the small hit game, a small hit ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), a small hit end flag is set (S2313), Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes “0” when the big winning opening is opened six times.

  Also, if it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), 6 opening operations have been completed (or a specified number of game balls have entered) It is determined whether or not the small ending time has elapsed (S2315). If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), special figure operation status setting processing 2 is performed (S2317), and the processing is terminated. By generating a small hit game in a highly accurate and low base state, it becomes possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls, which enhances the fun of the game. Note that the probability variation flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the processing is performed. Finish. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101) ), The special figure 2 small hit flag is turned OFF (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number process (S209) following the special figure 2 operation process (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read ( S2501). Next, the data on the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process ends.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power-off monitoring process (S210) subsequent to the reserved ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power-off monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2601). If it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2601), the current gaming machine status (whether it is probable, whether it is a winning game, the number of held balls, (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  As described above in detail, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is provided with the above-described characteristic configuration, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a unique effect that is not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. And has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment is a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination (the first special symbol (also referred to as “first information”) or the second special symbol (also referred to as “second information”). A high probability state (given a privilege) based on a pattern (also referred to as a “specific display mode”), and a high probability state (privilege) when a predetermined condition is established. Is supposed to end.

  The process of giving this high probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as “privilege grant means”. Since the first special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the second special symbol and the production symbol 8 are linked (synchronized), the variable display and the stop display are performed, and the same determination result is obtained. , "The special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the bonus symbol (specific display mode)". .

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, timer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter. In the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the same process as the power-off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. When turned ON, data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, data related to presentation control at the time of power interruption such as a power failure is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) at power-on after power-off such as a power failure (power-off recovery), effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. Will return to the state before the power failure occurred.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub control board 90. The random number for effect determination includes a random effect determination random number for determining the aspect of the effect symbol game effect to be executed (variable effect pattern), a random number for determining the notification effect for determining the notification effect, and an effect symbol determination for determining the effect symbol. There are random numbers. The random number update method may be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random number, the random number value may be added two by two instead of adding one by one. The effect determination random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been received is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of variation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a later-described variation effect pattern is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in an output buffer (also referred to as “sub output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transferred to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the lamp control. It transmits to the control board which becomes a corresponding command transmission destination among the boards 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Effect design game effects, special game effects related to winning games, etc.) are executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols and the like executed on the display screens of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to perform lighting control of various lamps, operation control of the movable decorative member, audio output control from a speaker, and the like.

[Reception interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt process (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception interrupt process (S4008), first, it is determined whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input section of the effect control microcomputer 91. Determine (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is finished. . This reception interrupt process (S4008) is a process executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed whenever an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 2 ms timer interruption process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d is performed (S4201). Next, lamp data output processing (S4202) for outputting lamp data for emitting lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 and driving data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203). The lamp data and the drive data are created by a 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, switch state acquisition processing is performed in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt processing is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4303), and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition processing Based on the data, switch processing for setting the display content of the display screen 7a is performed (S4304). Thereafter, other processes such as creating lamp data (data for controlling lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the effect determination random number are executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start incoming command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that a start incoming command has not been received (NO in S4401). When the process proceeds to S4403 and it is determined that the start pitching command is received (YES in S4401), the production hold information storage process (S4402) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4403. The production hold information storage process (S4402) is a process for determining various kinds of information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disturbance) included in the start ball entering command (Special Figure 1 start ball entering command or Special Figure 2 start ball entering command) received in S4401. (Game information such as numerical value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special figure holding balls at the time of sending and receiving the start incoming ball command (at the time of command generation) In the shift memory format, the information is stored in a predetermined production hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. For example, if the received start pitch command is a special Fig. 1 start pitch command corresponding to the number of held balls "4" in Fig. 1, the pre-determination result and hit type included in the special map 1 start pitch command Are stored as special figure 1 production hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 production hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used to execute various effects such as a change effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The contents stored in the effect hold information storage area (effect hold information) in the sub control board 90 are the special figure hold storage parts (first special figure hold storage part, second special figure) in the main control board (main control part) 80 described above. This is consistent with the stored content (acquired information) of the hold storage unit. From this, it can be said that the production hold information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also “acquired information storage means”.

  Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a variation start command has been received (YES in S4403), a variation effect start process (described later) ( S4404) is performed, and the process proceeds to S4405. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the variation effect start process. In S4405, it is determined whether or not a variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). If it is determined that a variation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. A variation effect end process to be ended is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays the effect symbol 8 that has been variably displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop effect is displayed, and the variation effect (effect symbol game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the change stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407 without performing the change effect end process. The variation effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol.

  Subsequently, in S4407, it is determined whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 in executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). Specifically, the start of the big hit game (occurrence of big hit game) ) Opening command sent at the time of the round, round start command sent at the start of the round, round end command sent at the end of the round, ending command sent at the end of the big hit game, the first big winning prize in the round game For example, the first big prize entry command sent based on the entry to 30th, the second big prize entry command sent based on the entry to the second big prize entry in the small hit game, etc. . In S4407, it is determined whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands is received. If not received (NO in S4407), the process proceeds to S4409, and if received (YES in S4407). Then, processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command is performed (S4408).

  For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command for specifying an opening effect corresponding to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if the command is a round start command, the command Set the round production command that specifies the round production according to the round specified based on the sub output buffer, and if it is an ending command, the ending that specifies the ending production according to the jackpot type specified based on the command Set the production command in the sub output buffer. In addition, if the received command is a winning game entry command (first winning game entry command, second winning game entry command), a winning game specified based on the command (first winning game) The entrance effect command designating the entrance effect corresponding to the entrance to the entrance 30 and the second grand prize opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When the various effect commands related to the set winning game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect or a round according to the progress of the winning game. An effect, a ball effect, etc. are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the process of S4409 is performed, and this process ends. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other received commands (for example, a normal symbol variation start command and a normal symbol variation stop command) excluding the various commands described above is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the variation effect start processing (S4404), first, effect determination random number processing (S4501) for obtaining various effect determination random numbers such as a random effect determination random number, a notice effect determination random number, an effect symbol determination random number, and the like is performed. In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the aspect of the effect design game effect (variation effect) to be executed, the mode of the notice effect (including presence / absence of the notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and the like are determined.

  Next, in S4502, the received variation start command is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) for designating the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In the variation pattern designation command, variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, game state information designating the current gaming state, determination of first special symbol success determination or second special symbol success determination The result includes symbol information for designating the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol and a variation corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game effect to be started this time It is possible to determine whether the (variation display of the effect symbol) relates to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Note that the variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

  Next, in S4503, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining an effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from “1” to “5”, and each value is assigned to the production modes A to E. Specifically, mode status “1” corresponds to effect mode A, mode status “2” corresponds to effect mode B, mode status “3” corresponds to effect mode C, and mode status “4” corresponds to effect mode B. Corresponding to the production mode D, the mode status “5” corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

  Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly of the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, some or all of the effect aspects of the game effect such as the notice effect and the reach effect are different. . Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as the aspect of the effect pattern 8 (for example, the pattern design, the number design, etc.) or the characters, items, and background images that appear is different. It will be different. In addition, the production symbol game production can be executed in a mode corresponding to the production mode, and when providing a plurality of game productions (notification production, reach production, etc.), different game production can be executed depending on the production mode. It can be. In the present embodiment, the production modes A and B are executed when the low-accuracy low base state is controlled, and the production modes C and D are executed when the high-accuracy low base state is controlled. Is executed when the low-accuracy base state is controlled and when the high-accuracy base state is controlled. Therefore, when the production mode is any one of A to D, the player confirms the production mode to grasp whether the current gaming state is the low probability low base state or the high probability low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low probability high base state or the high probability high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the production mode E can be said to be a gaming state non-notification mode.

  Next, in S4504, the change display is performed using the image display device 7, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14 and the like, and is controlled by the sub-control unit 90 (variation effect pattern, effect design). A variation effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining (game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the change pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80, the change effect pattern determination table to be used and the notice effect determination table are set. . That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set based on the gaming state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information designated by the received variation pattern designation command is “P1 (variation pattern P1)” (see FIG. 9), as a variation presentation pattern determination table, the big hit time corresponding to the current presentation mode A variation effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variation effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect (the variation pattern of the effect symbol etc.), and a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables (mode status) corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, a table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from the variation effect pattern determination tables.

  Next, in S4505, based on the random effect determination random number acquired in S4501 and the variable effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variable effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode of the effect symbol 8 displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) is set. As a result, in the effect design game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach effect effect game effect), when the character effect is performed using a specific character (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character In the case where the effect is not executed (non-reach effect symbol game effect) or the like is determined. The reach effect is, for example, that the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same as the display pattern of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination indicates that it is a big win In the case where a mode (a big hit mode, a specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) with a symbol (the same effect symbol) constituting the big hit mode Whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbols (three identical effect symbols) that complete the jackpot mode in a state where the remaining one is continuously displayed in a variable manner (scroll display). This refers to the production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character in accordance with the variation display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect character is stopped and displayed in a big hit mode is determined whether the predetermined character achieves a predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show in the production. Such game effects (reach effects and character effects described later) can also be referred to as story effects (specific game effects) and purpose effects (specific game effects). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the big hit and to enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, in S4505, based on the effect design determination random number acquired in S4501 and a stop design determination table (not shown), an effect design 8 (also referred to as “stop effect design”) to be displayed is determined and set. The effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the effect symbol game effect is that the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is out of reach, and if the reach is out of reach, three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R such as “787” are displayed. Among them, one effect symbol is different from the other effect symbols, and when it is out of reach, at least one effect symbol of three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as “635” is the other The production pattern is different

  In S4506, a notice effect (notice effect pattern) to be executed in association with the change effect pattern (effect design game effect) is determined. Moreover, it is also called an effect symbol game effect including the notice effect to be executed. This notice effect is an effect (preliminary) that indicates the possibility that the result of the effect effect game effect being executed will be stopped and displayed in a big win mode before the effect symbol is stopped (determination stop display) Notification effect). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the notice effect obtained in S4501 and the notice effect determination table set in S4504, the designated change pattern and the notice effect (notice effect pattern) suitable for the determined change effect pattern are selected. This is set (S4506).

  Then, in S4507, based on the change effect pattern and the notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, a change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 ( S4507), the variation production start process is terminated. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in step 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moreover, the fluctuation display (flashing display) by two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, an outline of the effect symbol game effect (variation effect) of the present embodiment will be described. As described above, when the change effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect or the like based on the change effect pattern or the like set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 On the display screen 7a, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started. An effect symbol game effect (variation effect) is configured as a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variation display of the effect symbol 8.

  In principle, the variation of the effect symbol 8 is “1” → “2” → “3”... → “7” → “8” → “9” (ascending order). Vertical scrolling) is performed by returning to “1” again when reaching “9” and repeating vertical scrolling. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the above-described variation effect pattern determination table. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various display modes such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are switched sequentially on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide a mode as a variation effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed in descending order. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a variation display mode according to the effect mode and the gaming state.

  In addition, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, the variation display is stopped. A plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes. Specifically, as the main stop mode, (1) The stop order (also referred to as “stop order”) of each of the design symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is “left symbol”. → Stop mode (also referred to as “first stop mode”) with “middle symbol → right symbol”, and (2) stop mode with “(left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol)” as the stop order of each symbol (“ (Also referred to as “second stop mode”) and (3) a stop mode (also referred to as “third stop mode”) in which all stop timings (stop timings) of the symbols are substantially the same (also referred to as “simultaneous stop”). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a “fourth stop mode”) in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same, and the middle symbol thereafter stops. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and it is determined in which stop mode the variable display is stopped depending on the variable effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern) can be performed separately. The first stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “first stop symbol”, the second stop symbol in the stop order is also called the “second stop symbol”, and the stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also referred to as “third stop symbol” or “final stop symbol”.

  Among the first to fourth stop modes, the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol) is the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination result being “small” mainly in the production mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that it is “winning”.

  In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in (1) production mode A and B (state A). In the case where the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the fact that, in the case of (2) the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” On the basis of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”), and (3) effect mode C ( In the state C), the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed by reach variation or normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” or “big hit” It is a stop mode that can be executed when stopping

  The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the circumstances (1) In the production modes A and B (state A), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of special figure holding balls works. The special figure 1 reserve ball number is “3” or “4”) and the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out”, and based on this, the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal variation , (2) In the production mode E (state B), when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed with normal fluctuation based on the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination being “out”, and (3 ) Stopping the variation display when the variation display of the production symbol 8 is performed in the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination being “out” in the production mode C (state C) This is a stop mode that can be executed.

  The fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol) is that the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “big hit” mainly in the production mode C (state C). When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is “out” or “hit” This is a stop mode that can be executed when the change display is stopped when the change display of the effect design 8 is performed with reach change.

  In this manner, a plurality of stop modes when stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided depending on the effect mode (game state) and the variation display mode and the result (stop display mode) based on the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. Thus, the stop mode can be varied depending on the game situation. In addition, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 stops, it is possible to guess the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 displayed (derived display) thereafter. Through this stop mode, it is possible to infer the types of special games that can be executed, the presence / absence of execution, the possibility, and the like. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the stop mode when the variable display stops and to give a sense of expectation for the subsequent special game.

  In addition to the first to fourth stop modes described above, for example, a stop mode (fifth stop mode) in which the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is “right symbol → left symbol → middle symbol”. ), And a stop mode (sixth stop mode) in which the stop timing of the left symbol and the middle symbol is substantially the same, and the right symbol is stopped thereafter (sixth stop mode). The conditions under which the aspect is executed are not limited to the present embodiment, and can be variously determined.

  In this embodiment, the symbols “1” to “9” constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that the symbols can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the gaming state (effect mode). Specifically, in state A (effect modes A and B), “7” among the odd symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “red symbol”), and other odd symbols are “1” and “3”. , “5”, “9” are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “green symbols”), and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” are blue symbols (hereinafter “blue”). It is also called “design”. On the other hand, in states B and C (direction modes C, D, and E), “3”, “5”, and “7” among the odd symbols are red symbols, and “1” and “9” that are other odd symbols Are green symbols, and even symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are blue symbols.

  Note that the correspondence relationship between the pattern and the color shown in the present embodiment is merely an example, and other correspondence relationships can be taken. The color type is not limited to the present embodiment, and other colors may be used. Can be used. In the present embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by color, but it can be determined by elements other than colors. For example, the type of character in the case where a character is attached to the production symbol, and the numeric design in the case of having the production design (character design) representing a predetermined character in addition to the production design (numerical design) representing a number The symbol type may be determined depending on the character symbol, and furthermore, the symbol type may be determined merely based on the odd symbol and the even symbol.

  The effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derived display) when the variable display is stopped according to the stop mode described above. The result of the variable display is notified. In the present embodiment, as the basic symbol combination (stop display mode), the “completely broken eyes” (“124”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all different symbols (numbers) and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and effect symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining effect symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a symbol (number) different from the others, such as “reach rose eyes” (“343”, etc. ) Is a detachment mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the winning game. On the other hand, “Zoro eyes” (“777”, etc.) in which the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all the same are used as a big hit mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a big hit game of 4R or higher (see FIG. 6). Yes.

  Assuming such a basic symbol combination, in this embodiment, the “reach ballet” is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). . This is because the 2R jackpot game has a smaller number of prize balls (the number of winning prize balls) that the player can acquire than the jackpot game of 4R or higher (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), state C (high It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase in possession) in a small hit game compared to (probably low base state), that is, for the player This is because it is a special game with a relatively low advantage (profit amount). In addition, the “completely broken eyes” among the broken eyes are also used as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). As described above, in the state B, since the second start port 21 is in an open state for most of the period, the small winning big winning port (the second winning port) located on the downstream side of the second start port 21 (second This is because it is difficult to enter the big prize opening 35), and the possibility of obtaining a profit by small hits is extremely low (infinitely close to zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Furthermore, a “specific breaker”, which will be described later, among the breakers is a small hit mode that triggers the execution of a small hit game (second special symbol small hit) in the state C (highly accurate low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific rosette) is also referred to as a “first display mode”, and the big hit mode (bottled eyes) is also referred to as a “second display mode”. Among the eye), the reach variation eye is also referred to as a “third display mode”, and the out-of-focus mode (complete break eye, reach variation eye) is also referred to as a “fourth display mode”.

  In addition, since the state A (low probability low base state) is a gaming state that is basically based on the left-handed game, the first special symbol propriety determination (firstly based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 (first) 1 special symbol variation display) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol success / failure determination (second special symbol variation display) is performed during the first special symbol variation display. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed under the circumstances, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation by the production display 102 is performed. Only display (and stop display) is performed. Similarly, state B (high base state) is a gaming state in which right-handed gaming is basically performed, and the first special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol determination based mainly on entering the second starting port 21) This is the case because it is rare that the second special symbol determination (fluctuation display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol success / failure determination is performed below, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display ( And stop display).

  Similarly, since the state C (highly accurate low base state) is a gaming state that is based on the right-handed game, the second special symbol propriety determination (mainly based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 ( Since the second special symbol variation display) is performed, it is rare that the first special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol variation display) is performed during the second special symbol variation display. When the first special symbol determination is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the production symbol 8 corresponding to the first special symbol is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but by the production display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is performed.

  However, when a special symbol win / rejection determination that is contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a determination result of “big hit” is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol correct / incorrect determination is made) If the result is a big hit), one or more display devices among the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 provide an effect display that suggests the occurrence of the big hit. Do. Thereby, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (the change display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, it is performed in parallel with the change display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the change display of the special symbol displayed is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player loses the opportunity to gain profits by stopping the game without noticing the occurrence of the jackpot.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high probability high base state, the high probability high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. If the gaming state after the big hit game is set to the high-accuracy base state in addition to or in addition to such a big hit type, the number of times determined in advance in the high-accuracy high-base state If the big win is not made until the special symbol variation display of (50 or 100) is completed, a big hit type in which the gaming state changes to the high probability low base state may be provided. By providing such a big hit type, the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a high base state, and when a special symbol variation display of a predetermined number of times is executed in the high base state, depending on the big hit type, The game state has a case of shifting to the low probability and low base state, a case of continuing the high probability and high base state, and a case of shifting to the high probability and low base state.

  As a result, it is possible to diversify the game mode change mode (transition mode), increase the game playability, and enhance the game entertainment. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game until a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed, a predetermined number of special symbol variations are displayed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which game state the game state is to be transferred to after the game is executed. Thereby, the player's gaming interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for an advantageous state is enhanced. In addition, even if the gaming state after the big hit game is not in the high probability low base state but in the high base state, the game state is changed to the high probability low base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations thereafter. It is possible to play a game in anticipation of this. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long time.

  In the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49). ) Are controlled by the main control unit. In place of such a mode, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation) Display control of c1 and c2) of the status indicator 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub-control unit. Thereby, even if a failure occurs in the display control of one control unit, it is possible to notify correct game information if the display control of the other control is appropriate. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display are provided in the same display unit (main display 40). Thereby, the first special symbol display device controlled by the main control unit and the second special symbol display device controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity so that the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control can be performed. It is possible to easily check whether there is any problem with the device.

  Similarly, in the first embodiment, the main control unit controls the display of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49). To do. In place of such a mode, the display control of the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is performed by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. Thereby, there exists an effect similar to the special symbol display mentioned above.

  Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second normal symbol display, a second first special figure hold indicator, a second second special figure hold indicator (not shown), a second common figure, not shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42) are main-controlled. Other control units such as a sub-control unit, the second special figure hold indicator (the first special figure hold indicator, the second special figure hold indicator), the second special figure hold indicator You may make it control by. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first special figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42), the first Two special figure hold indicators (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator) and second universal figure hold indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the both, easily check the consistency of the display contents, and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control.

  Also, a first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), a first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42), a first special symbol display indicator (First special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42), second special symbol indicator (variation state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second general-purpose hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily check whether there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. The main display 40 can be provided outside (outside) the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 outside (outside) the game area 3.

  In addition, when there is a power interruption (power interruption processing) for some reason during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power ON), the display is controlled by the main control unit when power is supplied again. Special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator 41a and second special symbol indicator 41b), first normal symbol indicator (normal symbol indicator 42), first special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first general figure hold indicator (common figure hold indicator 42) execute display (display control) first (restart and return). The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special figure, which are controlled by the sub-control unit. On-hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), second general figure hold示器 run the display (display control) after the (resumption, return) to.

  However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the fluctuation state display 49), the second special display controlled by the sub-control unit. An image display apparatus in which the figure hold display (second first special figure hold display, second second special figure hold display) and second universal figure hold display are also controlled by the sub-control unit. Display (display control) is executed (resumed and restored) earlier than (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, and / or third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display turns on / off / flashes each single LED, while the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the first display device). This is because the three-image display device 72) includes a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part which shows the special symbol propriety determination result and fluctuation state controlled by the same sub control part, the first sub display part which returns a display promptly after power-on (after power restoration) And a second sub display unit for returning the display after a delay. And according to each role, it becomes possible to perform optimal game control. The first sub display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variation state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (the variation state display 49) that are controlled by the sub control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second general figure hold indicator, and the simple With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly return after the power is turned on again. The second sub display unit corresponds to an image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / or the third image display device 72) that is also controlled by the sub control unit. In addition, it is possible to display various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) with complicated display control, and to improve the taste by various game effects.

  Further, in another aspect, when power is turned off for some reason during a game or during operation of the gaming machine (power is on), if power is supplied again, the sub-control unit The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second normal symbol indicator (c3 of the fluctuation state indicator 49), the second special symbol hold indicator (first 2 first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), the second universal figure hold indicator performs display (display control) first (resume, return), main control unit The first special symbol display (the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b), the first normal symbol display (the normal symbol display 42), the first special symbol, which are display-controlled. Hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator 43a, second special figure hold indicator 43b), first general figure hold indicator (general The hold display device 42) performs display (display control) later (resume, return), and the image display device (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, or / and the display control is performed by the sub-control unit) The third image display device 72) may further perform display (display control) after that (restart or return).

  Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The present embodiment 2 shows an embodiment of a configuration relating to an effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment 1 and its effect control. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. In the following, reference numerals and step numbers different from those in the first embodiment are used for configurations different from the first embodiment, and reference numerals, step numbers, and the like same as those in the first embodiment are used for common configurations.

  The various effects described in the second embodiment are the control processes (received command analysis process (S4302), fluctuation effects) performed by the sub-control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91), as described in the first embodiment. This is realized by starting processing (S4404), winning game effect processing (S4408) and the like. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as “production execution means” or “production control means”. In the second embodiment, the high base state (the low probability high base state and the high accuracy high base state, that is, the state B) in the first embodiment is also referred to as a “first game state”. The high base state (state B) is also referred to as “low probability and first gaming state”, and the high probability high base state (state B) is also referred to as “high probability and first gaming state”. The state (state C) is also referred to as “second gaming state” or “small hit frequent occurrence state”. The same applies to Example 3 and Example 4 described later.

[RTC function]
As shown in FIG. 53, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 92 is mounted on the sub-control board 90 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Note that the block diagram of the sub control board 90 shown in FIG. 53 is replaced with the sub control board 90 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  The RTC 92 corresponds to a time measuring unit capable of measuring the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 92 operates with the power when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 109. It operates with electric power (backup power supply) supplied from a backup power supply circuit (not shown). For this reason, the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on (when power supply is stopped). Further, even if the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are erased (so-called “ram clear”), the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time without being affected by it. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 92 may be provided on the sub control board 90. As the backup power supply circuit, for example, a circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (button battery or the like) can be employed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special effect related process (S4301) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010). The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 54 is replaced with the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. In the second embodiment, the special effect based on the result (RTC function) by the RTC 92 can be executed by the special effect related process (S4301). Hereinafter, the special effect related processing (S4301) will be described.

[Special effects related processing]
As shown in FIG. 58, in the special effect related processing (S4301), it is first determined whether or not the special effect execution flag is OFF (S5001). The special effect execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed. In other words, the special effect execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being performed. When the special effect is not executed (when it is not during the special effect period), the special effect execution flag is set to OFF, and when the special effect is being executed (when the special effect period is being performed), the special effect execution flag is set. Is turned ON. This special effect execution flag is turned ON by the processing of S5003 described later when the special effect starts, and is turned OFF when the execution time (effect time) of the special effect elapses and the special effect (special effect period) ends. The

  If it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), the process ends without performing the processes after S5002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect execution flag is OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether or not the current time measured by the RTC 92 is the start time of the special effect (S5002). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect based on the result of the time measured by the RTC 92 described above. In other words, the special effect is executed based on the result of the time measurement by the RTC 92 regardless of the result of the special symbol determination (special pattern fluctuation pattern), and the time measured by the RTC 92 is a preset time. It starts at (predetermined time). In S5002, with reference to the timing situation of RTC92, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time (start time) at which the special effect is to be started.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a predetermined time (start time) as a special performance execution condition (start condition) is set every hour from 10:00:00 to 22:00:00. ing. Therefore, a special effect is executed every hour (periodically) with 10:00:00 being the first time every day. Such special effects that are periodically executed are also referred to as “RTC effects”.

  When it is determined in S5002 that the current time is the start time of the special effect (YES in S5002), the special effect start command for setting the special effect execution flag to ON (S5003) and specifying the start (execution) of the special effect Is set in the sub output buffer (S5004). When this special effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 receives image data corresponding to the special effect pattern specified based on the special effect start command. Read from the ROM of the image control board 100 and execute a special effect or the like based on the read image data on the display screen of the image display device. The effect control microcomputer 91 executes output control of sound effects (effect sounds) and lighting control of various lamps in accordance with the image display (display effect) related to the special effects. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the current time is not the start time of the special effect (NO in S5002), the process ends without performing the processes after S5003.

  In this embodiment, the special effect is set to be executed (started) every hour, but the interval (cycle) at which the special effect is executed can be arbitrarily set (selected) on the game hall side. You may do it. For example, a setting switch (not shown) is provided on the sub-control board 90, and the execution interval (cycle) is set to a predetermined time (for example, “1 hour”, “2 hours”, or “3 hours”) by operating the switch. It can be set as the structure which can be set (period setting means). As a result, when a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed in the gaming hall, it is possible to arbitrarily set the environment in which special effects are simultaneously executed on the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 on the gaming hall side. It becomes. It should be noted that such a cycle setting can be performed not only by operating a switch on the sub control board 90 but also by operating an effect button provided on the front frame 51. In this case, a display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7 so that a person other than the player such as a store clerk or manager of the game hall can start by performing a predetermined input operation. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the cycle can be set by operating the effect buttons according to the screen. It is desirable to prevent the player from setting the execution cycle of such special effects. This is to prevent the execution interval of the special effect from being changed arbitrarily.

[Special production (RTC production)]
Next, the special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed by the special effect related process (S4301) described above will be described. The special effects (RTC effects) of this embodiment are mainly the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (also referred to as “sub liquid crystal”) provided on the left and right sides of the front frame 51, and the game area. 3 is executed using a first image display device 7 (also referred to as a “main liquid crystal”) provided in the approximate center of 3 and a speaker 67, and a main effect corresponding to a main effect part and its main effect And a prior effect performed prior to.

  The ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 stores image data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as “main effect image data”) and image data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as “preceding effect image data”). Has been. The ROM of the sub control board 90 stores acoustic data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as “main effect acoustic data”) and acoustic data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as “preceding effect acoustic data”). Yes. When the execution conditions of the special effects are established based on the result of the time measurement by the RTC 92, those data are read out, and the effect images related to the preceding effects and the main effects are displayed on the image display device, and the preceding effects and the main effects are displayed. A sound effect (effect sound) is output from the speaker. Thereby, the special effect is executed.

  One or both of the main effect image data and the preceding effect image data are also referred to as “special effect image data”, and either one or both of the main effect sound data and the preceding effect sound data are indicated as “special effect image data”. Also called “acoustic data”. An effect image corresponding to the main effect is also referred to as a “main effect image”, an image corresponding to the preceding effect is also referred to as a “preceding effect image”, and either or both of the main effect image and the preceding effect image. Is also referred to as a “special effect image”. Furthermore, the sound effect corresponding to the main effect is also referred to as “main effect sound”, the sound effect corresponding to the preceding effect is also referred to as “preceding effect sound”, and either the main effect sound or the preceding effect sound or Both are also referred to as “special effects”.

  Here, the special effects are produced based on the contents corresponding to the model equipped with the RTC function, and the contents are suitable to be executed periodically regardless of the result of the special symbol success / failure determination. . Examples of the material (contents) of special effects include cartoons, anime, movies, dramas, musicians and the like. In this embodiment, a plurality of special effects (special effects patterns) are provided, and each time a predetermined time is counted by the RTC 92 (in this example, every hour), the plurality of special effects (special effects patterns) It is executed one by one from the inside. Specifically, in this embodiment, 20 types of special effect patterns 1 to 20 are provided, and the contents of the main effects are different from each other. For example, if the pachinko machine 1 is a model based on a predetermined continuous drama and is a special production according to the theme, the main production of the special production (special production 1) based on the special production pattern 1 is the first. The content of the production is determined such that the main production of the special production (special production 2) based on the story and special production pattern 2 is the second episode.

  On the other hand, the contents of the preceding effects constituting the special effects are common to the special effects patterns 1 to 20 (special effects 1 to 20). The preceding effect of the present embodiment is an effect (countdown effect) that counts down the remaining period until the main effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), a numerical image 200 (countdown image) consisting of a single digit representing the remaining time (seconds) until the start of the main effect is displayed on the display screen of the first symbol display device 7. The preceding effect (countdown effect) is executed by displaying it at the approximate center of 7a and counting down the numbers one by one. In the present embodiment, a countdown effect (preceding effect) is executed about 5 seconds before the start of the main effect, and the numbers in the number image 200 are displayed one by one in order from “5”. Then, when the number indicated by the number image 200 becomes “0” (zero), the countdown effect ends, and subsequently, the main effect is started (see FIG. 56B).

  In the main production, for example, in the case of a special production of a model based on a series drama as described above, what number of episodes such as “Episode ○” is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) as a sub liquid crystal. An image (main effect image) indicating whether it is eyes (number of stories) is displayed, and an image (leader) showing titles corresponding to the number of stories is displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) as a sub liquid crystal. Output image) is displayed, and the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) as the main liquid crystal displays a drama video (main effect image) in accordance with the story (synopsis) corresponding to the number of stories (title). (See FIG. 56 (b)). In addition, while the main performance is performed, background music (BGM) such as a drama theme song or an insertion song is output from the speaker 67.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the special effect is executed with the time measured by the RTC 92 being a predetermined time, first, the countdown effect is executed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (see FIG. 56A). ) After the end of the countdown effect, the main effect is executed on the left and right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a and the main liquid crystal display screen 7a (see FIG. 56B). Note that the countdown effect that is executed as the preceding effect and indicates the remaining period until the main effect is started may not be based on the numerical image 200 as in the present embodiment. It may be based on a timer image in which the number of seconds is displayed up to 1/100 second and displayed in a countdown manner. In addition to the countdown effect, the predecessor effect is, for example, an effect (count-up effect) that shows the start of the main effect by counting up the numbers and time, and introduces the contents of the main effect that will start from now on. Any aspect can be used as long as the player can recognize that the main effect is to be started.

  In the present embodiment, the special effects (special effects 1 to 20) based on the special effect patterns 1 to 20 are executed in order from the youngest pattern number every hour (predetermined period). That is, the special performance 1 is executed when the first execution condition (time condition) is established after the pachinko machine 1 is operated (powered on) for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall. It is executed in the order of special performance 3. Then, when the special effect 20 is executed, the next operation returns to the special effect 1, and thereafter, the special effects 1 to 20 are executed in a loop. The production time (execution time) of the special production is determined according to the special production pattern, and in this embodiment, the production time of one time is about 5 to 6 minutes. Accordingly, a special production execution period (also referred to as a “special production period”) of about 5 to 6 minutes occurs every hour (predetermined period). Thereby, it becomes possible to attract the interest of the player who is in the game hall and the player who is playing the gaming machine 1.

  In addition, in a normal production state where the special production is not executed, that is, outside the execution period of the special production (also referred to as “normal production period”), information on the special production (main production) executed in the next cycle is provided. It is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal (not shown). In this case, the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal functions as an information display unit that displays information related to the next special effect (main effect). In this embodiment, as information related to the special effect (main effect), the remaining time until the time counted by the RTC 92 becomes the next start time, that is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started). The time and the contents of the next special production (main production) are displayed. The remaining time may be a timer display that counts down the time in a display format of, for example, “XX hours XX minutes XX seconds” (◯ is any value from “0” to “9”). Further, the content of the next special effect (main effect) can be displayed as the content of the next special effect (main effect), for example, as in “Episode ○: □□□□”.

  In this embodiment, the countdown effect that is executed when the information related to the next special effect (the remaining time and the content of the main effect in this example) is timed by the RTC 92 next becomes the predetermined time (start time). Is displayed until is finished. At this time, the countdown (“5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0”) of the numeric image 200 displayed in the countdown effect is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. Display control is performed so that the countdown of the remaining time ("0 hour 00 minute 05 second" to "0 hour 00 minute 00 second") is performed in agreement. Thereby, it is possible to link the countdown effect (countdown display of the numeric image 200) executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the countdown display of the remaining time displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). The special effect (main effect) can be started without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to a shift (mismatch) in the countdown display (remaining time).

  As described above, the execution interval (cycle) of the special effect can be arbitrarily set (selected) to any one of the “1 hour”, “2 hour”, and “3 hour” (predetermined time) on the game hall side. In such a case, the special effect (RTC effect) is executed (started) according to the set execution interval (cycle). Further, a special performance period occurs according to the set execution interval (cycle). Furthermore, information (remaining time, etc.) related to a special effect (main effect) executed in the next cycle in accordance with the set execution interval (cycle) is displayed.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 91 receives information on the execution status of the special production, such as the latest special production executed based on the result of timing by the RTC 92 and the content (type) of the special production executed next. The information is stored in the RAM of the control board 90, and the information is the target of backup (backup data) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. For this reason, for example, when the business of one day ends and the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off in a state where the special effects 1 to 10 are executed, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (starts operation) on the next business day. When the first execution condition (time condition) is satisfied, the special effect 11 is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to maintain the execution order of the special effects, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution order is out of order by the gaming machine (installation stand) installed in the game hall.

  Furthermore, the special effect may not be composed of the preceding effect and the main effect, and may be composed of only the main effect, for example. In addition, the configuration of the special effects is arbitrary, such as providing a plurality of preceding effects such as performing a further predetermined preceding effect before the preceding effects, providing a plurality of main effects, or performing a predetermined after effect after the main effects. It is.

  Here, as described in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has various functions under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 80. Production (game production) is executed. The effect is executed mainly in a mode corresponding to the state of the gaming machine (game state). The game state is controlled by the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) (state control means), and can be broadly classified as a waiting state in which a game such as a change display of identification information or a game is not performed. (Standby state), a variable game state in which the variation display of the identification information is performed, and a win game state in which a win game is performed. Further, the variable gaming state includes the above-described state A (low accuracy low base state), state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and state C (high accuracy low base state). Among these gaming states, the state A is a basic gaming state (normal gaming state), and when the big hit is won in this state A, the big hit gaming state in which the big hit game can be executed is obtained. Then, depending on the type (type) of the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit game becomes a state B or a state C that is more advantageous to the player than the state A. In this pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled in each gaming state, the special effect executed based on the result of the time measurement by the RTC 92 differs depending on the gaming state.

  That is, as described above, the special effect is composed of the preceding effect (countdown effect) and the main effect. When the time counted by the RTC 92 is a predetermined time and the execution condition (start condition) of the special effect is satisfied, FIG. First, a countdown effect is executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) (FIG. 56 (a)), and then starred on the left and right sub-liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a) and the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a). Is executed (FIG. 56 (b)). As described above, the special effects (preceding effect and main effect) are executed using the entire display screen of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal when the execution condition is satisfied (the time counted by the RTC 92 is the predetermined time). When the gaming state is controlled to the above-mentioned waiting state for customers or state A.

  On the other hand, when the game state when the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied is controlled to the aforementioned big hit game state, state B or state C, that is, more advantageous for the player than the normal game state. When the game state (also referred to as “special game state”) is controlled, the special effect is not executed in the main liquid crystal, but only in the sub liquid crystal. That is, the effect image (special effect image) related to the preceding effect or the main effect is not displayed on the main liquid crystal, and the special effect image is displayed only on the sub liquid crystal. This is because, in the special game state, effect images (effect designs, background images, etc.) corresponding to the special game state are displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a). For example, in the big hit game state, a round effect image is displayed, in the state B, an effect image dedicated to the high base state (effect design, effect hold, background image, etc.) is displayed, and in the state C, a special effect including during the small hit game is displayed. An effect image (effect design, effect hold, background image, etc.) is displayed. In this way, in the special game state, a dedicated effect according to the special game state is executed, so if the special effect is further executed under such circumstances, the effect will be too lively and the game will be rejected. There is a risk of reducing interest. The jackpot gaming state, state B, and state C do not occur unless conditions such as winning a jackpot (predetermined gaming conditions) are satisfied, so that it is possible to experience dedicated effects executed in these gaming states. Opportunities are difficult to obtain compared to special performances that are performed periodically (periodically). In view of the above, when the game state when the execution condition of the special effect is established is controlled to the customer waiting state or the state A (when not in the special game state), as shown in FIG. When the special effect image is displayed and the special effect is executed, and when it is controlled to the big hit gaming state, state B or state C (when it is in the special gaming state), as shown in FIG. The special effect is displayed by displaying the special effect image on the sub liquid crystal. Thereby, it becomes possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect according to the gaming state, and even when the special effect is executed in the special gaming state, the effect corresponding to the special gaming state It is possible to display the special effect image without hindering the visibility of the image.

  Specifically, when a special effect is executed while being controlled to a special game state (big hit game state, state B or state C), that is, when a special effect image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal, FIG. The special effect image (preceding effect image, main effect image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal shown in (b) is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), two left and right sub liquid crystals are provided, and a reduced special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal display screen 72a. Therefore, if the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied while being controlled to the big hit gaming state, state B or state C, the gaming state at that time is displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a (and the left sub liquid crystal display screen 71a). In a state where the corresponding effect image is displayed, the countdown image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal, and the main effect image is subsequently displayed. At this time, the main effect image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is the main effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) when the special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or in the state A. It is a reduced version. Therefore, for example, as described above, when the special effect is based on a continuous drama, the drama video is displayed smaller than the case where the drama video is displayed on the main liquid crystal. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or the state A, the “image indicating the number of stories” displayed on the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a) and the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). "And an image showing a title" (see FIG. 56B) are also displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (see FIG. 57A).

  Further, when the special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the display unit S (reduction display unit) for displaying the special effect image in a reduced size. Can be provided on a part of the display screen 72a, and the main effect image can be reduced and displayed on the display section S. That is, the special effect image can be displayed as a so-called “wipe screen”. This is because, in the special game state, an effect image corresponding to the special game state may be displayed not only on the main liquid crystal but also on the sub liquid crystal, so that the display of the effect image is not hindered.

  In the special game state, the special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the big hit game state, the state B and the state C are right-handed states in which a right-handed game is performed. This is because the person's consciousness tends to turn right from the center of the game board. Further, a display unit S (reduced display unit) for displaying a special effect image in a reduced size may be provided, for example, in a part of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (for example, the lower right).

[Advance notice]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice are given as the notice effects related to the display result of the change display of the identification information (special symbol and / or effect symbol). Has production. The first notice effect is a suggestion (suggest effect) that suggests that the display result of the currently running variable display may be a big hit mode (specific display result) (hit reliability). It is a suggestion that the reliability of the big hit of the variable display being executed is high (high expectation degree production), and in the third notice production, the display result of the variable display currently being executed is the big hit mode (specific display result). This is a suggestion (specific suggestion effect). The first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect are all notice effects related to the currently displayed change display (also referred to as “the change”), and the notice effect pattern set in S4506 described above. This is a kind of “change notice” that can be executed based on the above. Note that the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect can all be included in the variation effect pattern set in S4505 described above.

  In this embodiment, of the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect, the first notice effect can be executed when the gaming state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state). Yes, it is not executed when controlled to state B (high base state) and when controlled to state C (highly accurate low base state). On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in all game states of state A (low probability low base state), state B (high base state), and state C (high probability low base state). . That is, the first notice effect may be executed in the effect mode A or B, and may not be executed in other effect modes. On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in any of the effect modes A to E.

  The first notice effect is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting high or low of the big hit reliability on a predetermined display screen, and the display mode (display contents) of the suggestion image is one step according to a predetermined order. It is possible to change in stages from 1 to multiple stages (also called “stage production”). In the present embodiment, the display mode of the suggestion image can change up to the third stage. At the beginning of the first notice effect, the suggestion image is displayed in the display mode of the first stage, and the display mode of the suggestion image is changed in stages, and the higher the level, the higher the jackpot reliability is designed. ing. For this reason, the first notice effect includes a low reliability pattern that ends in the first stage, a medium reliability pattern that advances to the second stage, and a high reliability pattern that ends to the third stage. When the first notice effect is executed, any one of these patterns is set in the above-described S4506. The stage effect as the first notice effect may change up to two stages or may change more than four stages, and the number of stages is appropriately determined according to the effect time (effect time) of the variable effect. Can do.

  The first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the special effect (RTC effect) described above (when the special effect period has not occurred) and during the execution period of the special effect (the special effect period occurs). The execution mode (display mode) differs depending on the case where it is executed. That is, when the first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is sent from the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) to one main liquid crystal. The first suggestion image that can be displayed over the (first image display device 7) is displayed and executed, and the display mode of the first suggestion image can change from the first stage to the third stage. It has become. On the other hand, when the first notice effect is executed during the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is provided for each of the one sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71 or third image display device 72) and the main liquid crystal. The second suggestion image that can be displayed is displayed and executed, and the display mode of the two second suggestion images can change from the first stage to the third stage.

  For this reason, when the first notice effect is executed, the first notice effect pattern (also referred to as “first notice effect pattern”) according to whether or not the special effect is executed (execution status) at that time is the above-described S4506. Set by. That is, the low reliability pattern, the medium reliability pattern, and the high reliability pattern described above are provided in advance with ones corresponding to outside the execution period of the special effect and those corresponding to the execution period of the special effect, respectively. Any of these patterns is set according to the situation when the first notice effect is executed. The first notice effect that is executed outside the execution period of the special effect is also referred to as “normal first notice effect”, and the first notice effect that is executed during the execution period of the special effect is referred to as “special first notice effect”. It is also called “notice production”.

  Here, FIG. 60 shows an example of a table (first notice effect determination table) referred to when determining the first notice effect pattern set in S4506. As shown in the figure, the first notice effect determination table changes the first notice effect pattern to “first stage (low reliability)”, “depending on the variation pattern of the special symbol accompanying execution of the first notice effect. The data structure can be determined as either “first → second stage (medium reliability)” or “first → second → third stage (high reliability)”. Specifically, a random number value for determining the notice effect is assigned according to the determination type of the first notice effect pattern for each special symbol variation pattern that accompanies the execution of the first notice effect. In the present embodiment, since the random number range of the random number for determining the notice effect is “0 to 99”, the random number value (determination data) is assigned within the range of “0 to 99”.

  FIG. 60A is a table that is referred to when the first notice effect is executed with the big hit variation when the result of the first special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit. FIG. 60 (b) is a table that is referred to when the first notice effect is executed with the deviation variation in the case where the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable. The first notice effect pattern is determined according to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination in the state A (low probability low base state) in which the first notice effect can be executed. This is because the game state in which the variable display of one special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol success / failure determination is executed in the state A, it is assumed that the first notice effect is not executed based on the determination result (unexecutable).

  As shown in FIG. 60A, when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit and the first notice effect is executed with the big hit fluctuation, the low reliability that the first notice effect ends in the first stage. The pattern is not selected, and the medium reliability pattern that advances to the second stage and ends or the high reliability pattern that advances to the third stage and ends is selected. The possibility (selection rate) of selecting the high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 step → 3 step) is higher than the medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 step). Further, when the first notice effect is executed with the big hit fluctuation, the medium reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern is selected when the fluctuation pattern is “P1”. This is a relatively long variation time of 120 seconds (see FIG. 9) for the variation pattern “P1”, and the time for changing the display mode of the suggestion image (first suggestion image or second suggestion image) in two or more stages. This is because the display mode of the first suggestion image can be changed safely.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is out of order and the first notice effect is executed with the outlier fluctuation, the low reliability pattern (one step) is most selected. In the following description, the selectivity decreases (difficult to be selected) in the order of medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps) and high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps). In addition, when the first notice effect is executed due to out-of-range fluctuation, when the fluctuation pattern is “P6” or “P10”, only the low reliability pattern is selected without selecting the medium reliability pattern and the high reliability pattern. In the case of “P5” or “P9”, the high reliability pattern is not selected and the low reliability pattern or the medium reliability pattern is selected, and “P4” or “P8” is selected. ", The low reliability pattern, the medium reliability pattern, or the high reliability pattern is selected. In the case of the fluctuation patterns “P6” and “P10”, since the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (see FIG. 9), the medium reliability pattern (1 stage → 2 stages) and the high reliability pattern are included within that time. It is difficult to perform the first notice effect by (1 stage → 2 stage → 3 stage), and in the case of the fluctuation patterns “P5” and “P9”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds (see FIG. 9), so that time This is because it is difficult to perform the first notice effect by the high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 step → 3 step). In the case of the fluctuation patterns “P4” and “P8”, the fluctuation time is 120 seconds as in the case of the fluctuation pattern “P1” (see FIG. 9). Therefore, the low reliability pattern (one stage) and the medium reliability This is because the display mode of the suggestion image can be safely changed for both the degree pattern (1 step → 2 steps) and the high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps).

  In the case of out-of-range fluctuation, the first notice effect can be executed when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more. The fluctuation patterns “P7” (variation time 12 seconds) and “ For “P11” (variation time 4 seconds), the first notice effect is not executed. This is because the execution time of the first notice effect cannot be secured sufficiently.

  In the present embodiment, the first notice effect (usually the first notice effect) is executed outside the special effect execution period (normal effect period) and the first within the special effect execution period (special effect period). The same first notice effect determination table is used when the notice effect (special first notice effect) is executed. Then, image data for the first notice effect corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the special effect (the normal effect period or the special effect period) when the first notice effect is executed is read, and the first notice effect (normally based on the image data) The first notice effect or the special first notice effect) is executed. However, the first notice effect determination table can be made different between the normal effect period and the special effect period. That is, a first notice effect determination table for the normal effect period and a first notice effect determination table for the special effect period are provided, and whether or not the special effect is executed when the first notice effect is executed (the normal effect period or the special effect period). It is good also as a structure which sets the table to refer according to a production period. When the tables are provided separately as described above, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of the first notice effect pattern can be made different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and the appearance mode of the first notice effect is changed. It becomes possible to make it.

  Here, the execution mode (effect mode) of the first first notice effect and the special first notice effect will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 58, first, the first notice effect is usually executed by displaying an effect image 300 (also referred to as “shooting star image 300”) imitating a shooting star as a first suggestion image. As described above, the execution mode of the first notice effect (first notice effect pattern) includes a low reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in the first stage, and a medium reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in two stages. And three patterns of high reliability patterns that end up to three stages. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) includes a display mode (first display mode) corresponding to the first stage and a display mode (second display) corresponding to the second stage. Mode) and a display mode (third mode) corresponding to the third stage. 58, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage.

  Usually, in the first notice effect, the main liquid crystal (first image display device) located at the approximate center of the board in the game region from the sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) on both the left and right sides outside the game region. The effect display showing the shooting star flying toward 7) is performed using the shooting star image 300. That is, in the first stage of the first notice effect (first display mode), as shown in the upper part of FIG. 58, the shooting star image 300 is displayed on substantially the entire left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a). The shooting star image 300 is not displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a).

  Usually, in the second stage (second display mode) of the first notice effect, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 58, shooting star images 300 depicting more shooting stars than the first stage are displayed on the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a). ) And the shooting star image 300 is displayed in such a manner that it moves (flows) to the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal display screen 7a.

  Normally, in the third stage (third display mode) of the first notice effect, as shown in the lower part of FIG. ) And the shooting star image 300 is displayed in such a manner as to fly (flow) over substantially the entire display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

  Thus, the display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 normally associated with the first notice effect is substantially the whole of the left and right sub-liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a and a part of the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a ( It is provided on the left and right sides) or substantially the whole. The display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 is also referred to as a “first display unit”.

  In this embodiment, when the first first notice effect is normally performed in two or more stages, that is, when the first first notice effect is performed by the medium reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern, the normal first notice effect is so-called “pseudo”. It is executed along with the fluctuating effect by “Ren”. Pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream production) is to temporarily stop (temporarily stop) in a stop display mode (predetermined spotted eyes) other than the double-eyed after the production symbol 8 is variably displayed during one-time variation display of the special symbol. Then, it is a fluctuating effect that repeats a predetermined number of operations for displaying the effect symbol 8 again after that. A shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) at each stage is displayed from the start of each variable display constituting the pseudo-series until the first stop symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped).

  Specifically, for example, as the variation effect based on the effect pattern of the pseudo ream, the first (first) temporary stop is performed after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8, and then the second variation display (pseudo) is performed. 2) is performed, the second temporary stop is performed, and then the third variation display (pseudo 3) is performed. When the first notice effect is performed, the shooting star image 300 is displayed in the first display mode from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 until the first (first) temporary stop is performed (the upper part of FIG. 58), and the pseudo A shooting star image 300 is displayed in a second display mode from the start of 2 until the second temporary stop is performed (middle stage in FIG. 58), and a predetermined time (for example, when reach is established or predetermined) from the start of pseudo 3 to the final stop. Shooting star image 3) 0 is displayed in three-stage display mode (FIG. 58 bottom). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first first notice effect is normally performed in two or more stages, the first notice effect is usually executed along with the pseudo-rendition variation effect. In general, the stage of the first notice production is going up. By combining such a pseudo-ream and the normal first notice effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect of the change effect and improve the game entertainment.

  Note that the normal first notice effect by the low-reliability pattern (which ends at the first stage) is executed with a pseudo-continuous change effect and a non-pseudo change effect (non-pseudo-continuous effect). There may be either one or both of the cases. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the normal first notice effect of two or more stages is executed along with the pseudo-continuous change effect, but the normal first notice effect of two or more steps is accompanied with the non-pseudo change effect. May be executed. In this case, for example, a plurality of effects from a first stage effect to a plurality of stage effects in accordance with a predetermined order between the start of change of the effect symbols and the stop of the first stop symbol (temporary stop). As the “step-up notice effect” executed step by step, the first notice effect can usually be executed. In addition to the aspect in which the display mode of the shooting star image 300 is changed in a stepwise manner, the execution mode (effect mode) of the first notice effect is usually, for example, from the sub liquid crystal to the main liquid crystal as the first suggestion image ( A background image that can be displayed is provided, and the color change (eg, blue → green → red) of the background image indicates the stage (progress) of the first notice effect, and the background image can be moved and displayed. It is possible to adopt a mode in which the stage (advance) of the first notice effect is usually indicated by the movement amount (ratio of the display screen of the main liquid crystal). Alternatively, a character or item corresponding to the stage of the first notice effect is usually determined in advance, and a specific image (specific image) indicating the character or item is displayed on the image display device as the first suggestion image. Good.

  As described above, when the first announcement effect is normally performed up to the third stage, that is, when the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the third display mode, the third stage is reached (the third display mode is changed). The second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the change). The second notice effect of the present embodiment is mainly composed of a movable effect for operating the movable decorative member 14, and a predetermined sound effect is generated or lamps emit light accompanying this movable effect. In the second notice effect (movable effect), the movable decorative member 14 falls from the standby position and appears on the front side (display surface side) of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), and this state is displayed for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). After maintaining, it is performed in a mode of returning to the standby position (returning).

  The second notice effect is mainly composed of a movable effect, and mainly constitutes a display effect for displaying a predetermined notice image on the display screen of the image display device, or generates a predetermined sound effect (output from a speaker). The sound effect can be mainly configured, or the light effect in which the illumination members such as the panel lamp and the frame lamp can emit light in a predetermined light emission mode can be mainly configured, and two or more of them can be combined. You can also.

  In addition to the case where the second notice effect is usually performed through the execution of the first notice effect, the second notice effect is performed through the execution of the special first notice effect as described later, or is related to the execution of the first notice effect. In some cases, it may be performed independently at a predetermined time (for example, during the development of the production) during the production of the variation. Therefore, the second notice effect may or may not be the first notice effect (usually the first notice effect or the special first notice effect) prior to its execution. Therefore, for the player, when the first notice effect is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect, and thereby the first notice effect (implicit effect). It becomes possible to raise the player's interest in.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect is usually performed up to the third stage, and the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) is changed to the third display mode at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed. The second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed. A plurality of types of times are provided in advance as predetermined times for determining the execution timing of the second notice effect, and when the high expectation pattern is selected as the pattern of the first notice effect, the second notice effect is executed. Any one of a plurality of types of time is selected as the predetermined time. In the present embodiment, three types of “10 seconds”, “25 seconds”, and “40 seconds” are provided as the predetermined time, and any one of them is selected. When the fluctuation effect accompanying the execution of the first notice effect in the high expectation pattern is a big hit change, a relatively long time is more easily selected than a short time as the predetermined time until the second notice effect is executed, In the case of deviation fluctuation, on the contrary, a relatively short time is more easily selected than a long time. Thereby, after the first preliminary announcement effect is normally performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes the third display mode), the time taken until the second preliminary announcement effect is executed (predetermined) The longer the time), the higher the reliability of the big hit.

  Usually, when the first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (when the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the third display mode), until the second notice effect is executed (generated), Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display screen 7a. In the present embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 58, a timer image 400 showing the remaining time until the second notice effect is executed (generated) is displayed on the display screen 7a as an image showing the passage of time. It is displayed in the upper center of. For this reason, when a variation effect is performed in the normal effect period, first, the player is caused to pay attention to whether or not the first first notice effect (suggest effect) is executed in the variation effect. When executed, the player is focused on the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) in the normal first notice effect, and when the display mode of the shooting star image 300 becomes the third display mode, there is Thus, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timer image 400 indicating the remaining time until the second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player who expects the execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that suggests that the reliability of the big hit is relatively high. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the production period does not occur (during the normal production period).

  Note that the timer image 400 may indicate the time elapsed until the second notice effect is executed (occurs) in a count-up format. In this case, how long the time indicated by the timer image 400 is advanced under the specification (gameability) that the big hit reliability increases as the time (predetermined time) required until the second notice effect is executed ( It is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation by paying attention to the player. Also, the time from when the first notice effect is normally performed to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the third display mode) until the second notice effect is executed (occurs). The image showing the progress may not be the timer image as in the present embodiment, and if the player can recognize the time taken until the execution of the second notice effect, for example, the elapsed time is displayed in a meter format. Various images such as an image shown and an image shown in an hourglass format can be adopted.

  Next, the special first notice effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, the special first notice effect displays, as a second suggestion image, a character image 500 made up of characters “in preparation” and a horizontally long gauge image 600 indicating the progress of the special first notice effect. It is executed by doing. The character image 500 is displayed on the lower left portion on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (image display device 7), and the gauge image 600 is displayed on the lower portion of the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71). Thus, both are displayed so as not to impair the visibility of the special effect image related to the special effect being executed on each display screen and the effect thereof. During the execution of the special first notice effect, the display positions of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are not changed (fixed) until the effect ends. This is also in order not to impair the visibility and the effect of the special effect (special effect image).

  As described above, the first notice effect pattern includes three patterns: a low reliability pattern (1 step), a medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps), and a high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps). Since it is provided (see FIG. 60), the display mode (first display mode) corresponding to the first level and the second level are also displayed in the display mode of the second suggestion image including the character image 500 and the gauge image 600. And a display mode (third display mode) corresponding to the third stage is provided. In FIG. 59, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage. In addition, when the first first notice effect is usually performed in two or more stages, the first first notice effect is usually executed along with the fluctuating variation effect. It is executed with a non-variable production (non-pseudo-continuous production). During the special effect period, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 59, the effect design 8 is displayed small in the lower right part of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, and the special effect mainly including the display of the special effect image is executed. This is because the pseudo-ream with the production pattern 8 has a poor production effect and does not perform the pseudo-ream (pseudo-continuous production).

  In the special first notice effect, the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 gradually changes as the execution time of the effect elapses. That is, when the special first notice effect is started, the characters “semi”, “preparation”, and “medium” that make up the character image 500 are displayed in a colorless and semi-transparent manner, and the gauge image 600 is displayed. Displayed with zero gauge. As the special first notice production progresses (time elapses), the character of “quasi” among “quasi”, “preparation”, and “medium” gradually changes from colorless and translucent to colored and opaque. When it becomes completely colored and opaque and becomes clearly visible, the first stage of the special first notice effect is completed. At this time, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 59, the “quasi” characters in the “preparing” character image 500 are displayed in colored opaque (for example, opaque red), and the remaining “preparation” and “medium” are displayed. The characters are still displayed as colorless and translucent, and the gauge image 600 is displayed with the gauge amount advanced to about 1/3 (first display mode). In FIG. 59, of the characters “in preparation”, colorless and translucent characters are shown in white. When the special first notice effect is executed with the low reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the first display mode (first display mode) shown in the upper part of FIG. The display mode does not change, and then the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends at the first stage. The variation display of the effect symbol 8 ends at substantially the same timing as or after the end of the special first notice effect.

  Further, when the special first notice effect progresses to the second stage, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 59, the characters “quasi” and “preparation” in the “preparing” character image 500 are colored and opaque (for example, opaque The remaining “middle” characters are still colorless and translucent, and the gauge image 600 is displayed with the gauge amount advanced to about 2/3 (second display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed with the medium reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 is the second display mode (second display mode) shown in the middle of FIG. The display mode does not change, and then the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends in the second stage. The variation display of the effect symbol 8 ends at substantially the same timing as or after the end of the special first notice effect.

  Further, when the special first notice effect progresses to the third stage, as shown in the lower part of FIG. (For example, opaque red) and the gauge image 600 is displayed in a fully filled state (third display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed with the high reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the third display mode (third display mode) shown in the lower part of FIG. The first notice effect is ended, and thereafter, the second notice effect (high expectation degree effect) is executed. This second notice effect is an effect in the same manner as when the above-mentioned normal first notice effect is executed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the third stage. That is, it is a notice effect mainly composed of a movable effect for operating the movable decorative member 14. Further, when the second notice effect is executed through the above-described normal first notice effect, the second notice effect is usually executed at a timing when a predetermined time has passed since the first notice effect was performed up to the third stage. However, the second notice effect that is executed through the special first notice effect is also performed after the special first notice effect is performed until the third stage (the display mode of the second suggestion image is third). It is executed at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (after changing to the display mode). For this reason, the second notice effect (high expectation effect) executed when the first notice effect is performed up to the third stage is the same (effect) regardless of whether or not the special effect period has occurred. Content). As a result, the second notice effect (high expectation degree effect) executed through the first notice effect can be made common and the effect easy to understand for the player.

  Thus, the display location (display position) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 relating to the special first notice effect is a part (lower part) of the left sub liquid crystal display screen 71a and the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a. Is provided in a part (lower left). The display location (display position) of these character image 500 and gauge image 600 is also referred to as “second display portion”.

  When the second notice effect is executed through the special first notice effect, the timer image indicating the remaining time until the execution (generation) of the second notice effect is the sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71, third image). It is not displayed on any display screen of the image display device 72) and the main liquid crystal (first image display device 7). This is because during the special production period during which the special first notice production is executed, the special production (display of the special production image) is performed using the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal, and the visibility and production effect of the special production are performed. This is so as not to damage the. However, it is an image that is different from the timer image 400 (see FIG. 58) when the second notice effect is normally executed after the first notice effect, and suggests the execution (occurrence) timing of the second notice effect. May be displayed on one of the left and right sub-liquid crystals. Specifically, for example, a count image that is smaller than the timer image 400 and that indicates a period until the second notice effect is executed by counting up or down a number is displayed, and a value indicated by the count image The second notice effect may be executed when becomes a predetermined value. In this case, the count image may be displayed in a category that does not impair the visibility and effect of the special effect.

  Further, when the second notice effect is executed through the special first notice effect, the timing when the special first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (the timing when the display mode of the second suggestion image becomes the third display mode). ), The second notice effect may be executed (generated). This is because it is not necessary to display an image (timer image 400 or the like) indicating a period until the second notice effect is executed, and it is not necessary to provide an image for that purpose.

  Furthermore, when the second notice effect is executed through the special first notice effect, that is, when the second notice effect is executed during the special effect period, the mode of the second notice effect is usually set as the first notice effect. When the second notice effect is executed through the above, that is, the second notice effect may be executed during the normal effect period. For example, as the second notice effect during the special effect period, an image (movable effect descriptive image) depicting a state in which the movable decorative member 14 has fallen or an image suggesting that the big hit reliability is high (high expectation image) May be displayed small on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or the main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. In this case, for example, a reduced display unit such as the above-described display unit S (see FIG. 57B) is provided on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or the main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. The display unit can be configured to display a movable effect descriptive image, a high expectation image, and the like. Alternatively, the second notice effect executed during the special effect period is not made to appeal to the player's vision (visual effect) like a movable effect executed as the second notice effect during the normal effect period. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be temporarily generated (output) to produce an effect (auditory effect) that appeals to the player's hearing. By adopting these configurations, it is possible to execute the second notice effect (high expectation effect) so as not to impair the visibility and effect of the special effect being executed as much as possible. In this way, by changing the mode (effect content) of the second notice effect in the normal effect period and the special effect period, the second notice in a mode (effect content) suitable for each of the normal effect period and the special effect period. It is possible to perform the production. This makes it possible to differentiate the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that is executed after the first notice effect is performed up to three stages, and attract the player's interest in the difference. It becomes possible.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the first notice effect can be executed in a different manner between the normal effect period and the special effect period. Therefore, the mode of the first notice effect (effect content) is made different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, or the suggestion effect is executed in a mode (effect content) suitable for each of the normal effect period and the special effect period. Etc. are possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effects of both the special effects (display of the special effect image) and the first notice effect, thereby improving the game entertainment.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first notice effect (usually the first notice effect) is executed during the normal effect period, the first notice effect is a shooting star image 300 (in which the display mode can change as the stage progresses). The first suggestion image) is executed by being displayed partially or entirely on the left and right sub liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a and the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the first notice effect (special first notice effect) is executed during the special effect period, the first notice effect includes the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (the first image whose display mode can be changed as the stage progresses). 2 suggestion image) is partially displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal display screen 71a and the central main liquid crystal display screen 7a. In this case, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are usually the first notice. It is displayed smaller than the shooting star image 300 related to the effect, and the display range (display ratio) occupying the display screen is also small. For this reason, in the first notice effect executed during the normal effect period, the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently, and the player pays attention to the display mode (that is, the normal first notice effect). On the other hand, in the first notice effect executed during the special effect period, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (second suggestion image) are displayed conservatively so that the effect (special effect) by the special effect image is not impaired. However, it is possible to suggest the jackpot reliability of the fluctuation. Accordingly, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a different impression in the normal effect period and the special effect period, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the difference and improve the game entertainment.

  In the present embodiment, the first notice effect is a stage effect in which the display mode (display contents) of the suggestion image can be changed in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order. As the time elapses, the type of the suggestion image (character, item, etc.) displayed in the first notice effect is changed, the display position of the suggestion image is changed, etc., and the big hit reliability of the change is suggested. If it is possible, the production mode is not limited.

  Next, Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described. Example 3 relates to a special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC function of Example 2 described above, and has a notice effect function based on a pre-determined result (holding pre-reading) of special figure hold. It is added.

  Here, in the above-described second embodiment, it is possible to execute the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) that suggests that the display result of the variable display currently being executed becomes a big hit mode (specific display result). In other words, the third notice effect can be executed as the notice effect (hit notification effect) with a big hit reliability of 100%. The third notice effect may be, for example, displaying a predetermined notice image (big hit confirmed image) suggesting a big hit on the image display device, or generating a sound effect (big hit confirmed sound) suggesting a big hit (speaker). Or output it from

  In the above-described second embodiment, the third notice effect can be executed as “the relevant change notice”. In the third embodiment, in addition to this, based on the preliminary determination result (holding pre-reading) of the special figure hold. It can also be executed as a “hold prefetching notice”. And the 3rd notice effect as the reservation prefetch notice can be performed by cooperation with a special effect (RTC effect). In the third embodiment, the special effect related process (S4301) shown in FIG. 61 is executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 as the control related to the execution of the third notice effect. The special effect related process (S4301) of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 61 is replaced with the special effect related process (S4301) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the special effect related processing (S4301) of the third embodiment will be described.

  In the following description, reference numerals and step numbers different from those in the first and second embodiments are used for configurations different from the first and second embodiments, and common reference numerals and step numbers and the like are used for the common configurations. I will do it. In the following description, it is assumed that the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is a sound effect (specific sound effect) in which a predetermined jackpot sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Special Effects Related Processing of Example 3]
Of the special effect related processing (S4301) shown in FIG. 61, the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 are the same as the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 of the special effect related processing (S4301) of the second embodiment described above. Description of is omitted.

  When it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), that is, when the special effect is being executed (during the special effect period), it is the timing when the preceding effect ends. Whether or not is determined (S5005). As described above, the special effect (RTC effect) included in the pachinko machine 1 is composed of the preceding effect and the main effect, and when the preceding effect ends, the main effect is executed (started) subsequently. It has become. The preceding effect is configured as a countdown effect that counts down until the main effect is started, and the numbers in the number image 200 (countdown image) are counted down one by one (see FIG. 56A). ). In S5005, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the countdown display in the countdown effect becomes “0” (preceding effect end timing). For example, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) activates a timer that measures the execution time of the preceding effect triggered by the start of the preceding effect (transmission of a special effect start command). Can be done with reference to. As described above, the preceding effect (countdown effect) is started about 5 seconds before the start of the main effect, so the execution time of the preceding effect is about 5 seconds, and the timing when the 5 seconds have elapsed is the end timing. Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 are connected so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and the image control microcomputer 101 monitors the countdown status of the numeric image 200 (countdown image). When “0” becomes “0”, a signal (feedback signal) indicating that is output to the sub-control unit 90, and the end timing of the preceding effect can be determined based on the input of the signal. .

  If it is determined in S5005 that it is not the end timing of the preceding effect (NO in S5005), the process ends without performing the processes after S5006. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preceding effect (YES in S5005), the effect hold information storage area in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is accessed, and the stored content (effect hold information) is checked (S5006). As described above, in the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means), information such as a prior determination result and a hit type included in the start ball entering command transmitted from the main control unit 80 is stored as effect hold information. The stored contents (production hold information) coincide with the stored contents (acquisition information) of the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure hold storage unit) of the main control unit 80. Therefore, by checking the storage contents (production hold information) in the production hold information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determined result of special figure hold that is currently stored.

  Here, the production hold information includes, as described above, special figure 1 production hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold and special figure 2 production hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold. The information storage area includes a special figure 1 production hold information storage area for storing special figure 1 production hold information and a special figure 2 production hold information storage area for storing special figure 2 production hold information. In S5006, the target of the production hold information to be checked is switched to the special figure 1 production hold information or the special figure 2 production hold information according to the gaming state at that time. Specifically, when the game state is state A or state B, the special figure 1 production hold information is a check target, and when the game state is state C, the special figure 2 production hold information is a check target. This is because the state A and the state B are gaming states in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the state C is a gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed.

  Next, in S5007, as a result of the check in S5006, in the production hold information stored in the production hold information storage area, there is production hold information (specific production hold information) whose pre-judgment result is a big hit. That is, it is determined whether or not the big hit hold (acquired information with the display result of the variable display as the specific display result) is stored (S5007). Here, the types of big hits are “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, “15R fifth big hit”, “2R sixth big hit” and There is "2R seventh big hit". Of these, the 2R sixth big hit and the 2R seventh big hit are states C (highly accurate and low base state) in which the amount of prize balls that the player can acquire is less than other big hits and is advantageous for the player. Because it is a big hit that triggers the end of the process, it is not considered as a determination target in S5007. In other words, 2R 6 big hits and 2R 7 big hits are not subject to the third notice effect, and it is assumed that 2R 6 big hits and 2R 7 big hits are stored (2R big hit hold) However, the third notice effect based on that is not executed (cannot be executed). If this is the target of the third notice effect, it is disadvantageous for the player that a large number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the state C (highly accurate low base state) ends even though the third notice effect is executed. This is because the situation may occur and the player may be offended.

  Therefore, in S5007, “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit” or “ If the big hit hold of “15R 5th big hit” is stored, it is determined that the big hit hold is stored (YES in S5007), and the big hit hold is not stored (only the off hold) or is stored If the hold is 2R jackpot hold, it is determined that the jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007). If it is determined that the jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007), the process ends without performing the processes after S5008, and if it is determined that the jackpot hold is stored (YES in S5007) 3. Executing a notice effect (outputting a big hit confirmation sound), and the process ends.

  By executing the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) by the processing of S5008, a big hit definite sound is generated at the timing when the countdown display in the countdown effect becomes “0” (previous effect end timing) (output from the speaker 67) ) For this reason, it becomes possible to make a player recognize that the jackpot hold is included in the special figure hold stored at that time. Thereby, when the special effect is executed (started), the player is noticed whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed before the start of the main effect constituting the special effect, It becomes possible to improve amusement interest. In particular, the preceding effect performed prior to the main effect is a countdown effect, and the countdown effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect is started, but the third notice effect is executed. Indicates the remaining period until the execution (countdown of the third notice effect), and the player assumes that the timing at which the countdown display becomes “0” (previous effect end timing) is the execution timing of the third notice effect. Can also be recognized. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the player's thrilling feeling as the countdown effect approaches the end, and the interest in the period from the start of the special effect to the start of the main effect (especially when the countdown effect ends) It becomes possible to raise.

  If the game state when the third notice effect is executed by the process of S5008 is the normal game state (state A), it is executed after the third notice effect is executed, that is, after the countdown effect (preceding effect) is finished. As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the display of the effect image (main effect image) related to the main effect may be performed not on the main liquid crystal but on the sub liquid crystal. It is determined that the game state will shift to the big hit game state (special game state) by digesting the big hit hold later, and any effect image corresponding to the special game state will be displayed on the main liquid crystal. Because. In addition, while the main effect image is reduced and displayed on the sub liquid crystal, the effect display (reach effect, development effect, etc.) related to the big hit change accompanying the digestion of the big hit is displayed as usual (largely) on the main liquid crystal. This is because it is possible to enhance the interest by making the player pay attention to the effect display related to the big hit fluctuation (big hit fluctuation effect).

  In addition, when the third notice effect is executed by the process of S5008, the big hit hold that triggered the execution of the third notice effect is digested and the big hit symbol is confirmed (specific display result is derived and displayed) or Even if the big hit game is started (that is, until the big hit occurs), the effect image (main effect image) related to the main effect performed after the execution of the third notice effect (after the preceding effect) is not displayed (not visible). Good. This is also because it is possible to enhance the interest by making the player pay attention to the big hit fluctuation production accompanying the digestion of the big hit reservation. In this case, the main effect image can be displayed (become visible) with the start of the big hit game.

  Furthermore, when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008, after that, a more premiere effect (dedicated effect) is executed in the period until the big hit occurrence (definite display of the big hit symbol or start of the big hit game). Yes. In this way, it is possible to make the effect of the performance by executing the third notice effect at the end of the countdown effect more remarkable. As such a premier effect, for example, displaying a dedicated image (dedicated image) that suggests the determination of the on-hold jackpot decision.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the timing at which the third notice effect is executed by the process of S5008 is the end timing of the preceding effect, that is, the timing at which the number of the number image 200 displayed by the countdown effect becomes “0”. However, the timing at which the third notice effect is executed is any timing from the start of the preceding effect (special effect) to the end of the preceding effect (within the execution period of the preceding effect). Good. That is, the third notice effect may be executed at a predetermined time from when the special effect (preceding effect) is started to when the preceding effect is ended based on the establishment of the execution condition of the special effect. For example, when the preceding effect is the countdown effect described above, the third notice effect is executed at a timing when the number of the number image 200 becomes a predetermined number until the number is counted down from “5” to “0”. Can be configured. Even in this case, when the special effect is executed (started), the player is caused to pay attention to whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed before the main effect constituting the special effect is started. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  In addition, when executing the third notice effect at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the preceding effect, the execution time (execution timing) may be determined. In this case, for example, the production hold information was checked at the end timing of the previous production by the processing of S5005 and S5006 described above, but instead, the production hold information at the start timing of the special production, that is, the start timing of the previous production. Check. As a result, when the third notice effect is to be executed because the big hit hold is stored, it is determined by random number lottery etc. at which timing within the execution period of the preceding effect the third notice effect is executed. decide. Accordingly, since the player does not know at which timing the third notice effect can be executed from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the preceding effect, the third notice effect can be executed. It is possible to further enhance the interest within the preceding production period.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the third notice effect is executed when the big hit hold related to the big hit other than the 2R big hit is stored as a result of the production hold information check in S5006. The third notice effect may be executed when a big hit hold (specific big hit hold) related to a specific big hit is stored among the big hits. Specifically, among the “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit”, “4R third big hit”, “4R fourth big hit”, and “15R fifth big hit”, the gaming state after the big hit game ends Big hit that becomes C (2nd gaming state), that is, the big hit hold (the display result of the variable display is the second specific display according to any of “15R first big hit”, “4R second big hit” and “15R fifth big hit” When the acquired information obtained as a result is stored, the third notice effect is executed. In this case, the big hit hold (the display result of the variable display) according to any of “4R third big hit” and “4R fourth big hit”, which are big hits in which the gaming state after the big hit game ends is the state B (first gaming state). Is acquired as the first specific display result), the third notice effect is not executed. In this way, when it is determined at the start of the special effect that the state C (highly accurate and low base state), which is the most advantageous game state for the player among the variable game states, has been determined, The third notice effect will be executed before the start, and the third notice effect will notify the confirmation of the transition to the state C. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed when the special effect is executed. If a big hit hold related to either “4R third big hit” or “4R fourth big hit” is stored, another notice effect may be executed instead of executing the third notice effect. Good. In this way, depending on the type of the notice effect that can be executed after the start of the special effect and before the start of the main effect, whether or not the big hit hold that works relatively favorably for the player is stored, or the other big hit hold is stored It is possible to suggest whether it is present or not. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the player's interest in the notice effect that can be executed before the start of the main effect.

  Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a cancel function is added to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC function of the second and third embodiments described above so that the execution of the special performance (RTC performance) can be stopped by the player's intention. It is what. In realizing this cancel function, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 executes the special effect stop selection process (S4300) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) shown in FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 62 is replaced with the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the first and second embodiments shown in FIGS. Hereinafter, the special effect stop selection process (S4300) will be described.

  In the following description, the reference numerals and step numbers different from those in the first to third embodiments are used for the configurations different from the first to third embodiments, and the same reference numerals and step numbers as the first to third embodiments are used for the common configurations. I will do it.

[Special production cancellation selection process]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the special effect stop selection process (S4300), it is first determined whether or not the acceptance period flag is OFF (S6001). Here, in this embodiment, apart from the effect button 63, an operation lever (not shown) for inputting an operation signal to the sub control board 90 is provided around the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51. This operation lever functions as an input means for the player to input as with the effect button 63. The period during which the sub control board 90 (production control microcomputer 91) can process the input of the operation signal based on the operation of the operation lever as being effective is referred to as “acceptance period” (operation effective period). ). The reception period flag is a flag indicating whether or not it is in the reception period, and is turned ON when it is during the reception period, and is turned OFF when it is not during the reception period.

  The operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63 because the execution timing of the effect (operation-compatible effect) based on the operation of the effect button 63 and the selection timing of execution / non-execution (cancellation) of the special effect overlap. It is because of considering the time when it was done. That is, when the operation lever is not provided, the operation of the effect button 63 under the situation where these two timings are overlapped, either “operation corresponding effect” or “selection of execution / non-execution (stop)”. It is necessary to correspond to one or both, and the control is complicated accordingly. In order to avoid such complicated control, an operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63.

  If it is determined in S6001 that the reception period flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S6001), the process proceeds to S6004 described later, and if it is determined that the reception period flag is OFF (YES in S6001) It is determined whether it is the start timing of the period (S6002). In this embodiment, the reception period is set (set) before the time counted by the RTC 92 reaches the start time (predetermined time) of the special effect. Yes. Specifically, the reception period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start time. Therefore, in S6002, it is determined whether or not it is 30 seconds before the start of the special effect. If so, it is determined that it is the start timing of the reception period (YES in S6002), and if not, the reception period It is determined that the start timing is not reached (NO in S6002). The start timing of the reception period and the length of the reception period are not limited to the time shown in the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined.

  If it is determined in S6002 that it is not the start timing of the acceptance period (NO in S6002), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S6003, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the acceptance period (YES in S6002) The period flag is turned ON (S6003), and a selection screen display start command is set in the sub output buffer (S6004). When the selection screen display start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) described above, the image control microcomputer 101 selects a selection screen (selection image) that allows the player to select execution or cancellation of the special effect. Are read out from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. At this time, when the variation effect or the big hit game effect is executed on the display screen 7a, the selection screen is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the effect image being executed. If the effect being executed is a specific effect having a relatively low appearance rate (selection rate) among a plurality of predetermined effects such as a super reach effect and an advanced effect, the above-described wipe screen is used. Alternatively, the selection screen may be displayed smaller than usual. Further, the display unit (selected image display unit) on which the selection screen is displayed may not be the main liquid crystal display screen 7a, but may be one of the left and right sub liquid crystal display screens 71a and 72a.

  Here, although the selection screen is not shown, the content of the selection screen is, for example, if the special effect is based on a continuous drama as described above, “Do you watch the drama?” Message image is displayed in the upper area of the screen, and a character image of “Yes” and a character image of “No” are displayed side by side on the left and right or up and down below the message image. "Or" No "can be selected and displayed. The player recognizes the occurrence (start) of a period (acceptance period) in which the execution / non-execution (cancellation) of the special effect can be selected by displaying the selection screen on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal display. Can be selected and “Yes” (execution of special effect) or “No” (non-execution of special effect) is selected by operating the operation lever during the selection screen being displayed, that is, within the reception period. be able to.

  In this embodiment, an operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63, and “Yes” or “No” (execution / non-execution of the special effect) can be selected by operating the operation lever. Selection may be made by operating either one or both of 63a and the second effect button 63b. Further, the input means provided separately from the effect button 63 may not be an operation lever, and may be, for example, a touch panel or a dial-type switch.

  Next, in S6005, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the acceptance period (S6005). In this embodiment, as described above, the reception period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start of the special effect. Therefore, in S6005, it is determined whether or not 15 seconds have elapsed from the start of the reception period (reception period flag ON). If it has elapsed, it is determined that the reception period has ended (YES in S6005). If not, it is determined that it is not the end timing of the acceptance period (NO in S6005). In S6005, for example, the sub-control unit 90 (production control microcomputer 91) operates a timer that measures the elapsed time of the reception period triggered by the start of the reception period (reception period flag ON). This can be done with reference to a timer.

  If it is determined in S6005 that it is not the end timing of the acceptance period (NO in S6005), the process ends without performing the processes after S6006. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the reception period (YES in S6005), it is determined whether or not there is an instruction to cancel the special effect scheduled to start thereafter (S6006). This determination is made by referring to the selection result on the selection screen described above. That is, at the end of the reception period, it is determined whether “Yes” (execution of special effect) or “No” (non-execution of special effect) is selected on the selection screen, and “Yes” is determined. If it is selected, it is determined that there is no instruction to stop the special effect (NO in S6006), and if “No” is selected, it is determined that there is an instruction to cancel the special effect (YES in S6006).

  If it is determined in S6006 that there is no special production stop instruction (NO in S6006), the process proceeds to S6009 described later, and if it is determined that there is a special production stop instruction (YES in S6006), the special production flag is turned on. (S6007), the next special performance information command is set in the sub output buffer (S6008). When the next special effect information command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-described command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is an image corresponding to information related to the special effect (main effect) executed in the next cycle. Data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the information is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal (information display unit). The information displayed at this time is the information displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal in the normal effect period described in the second embodiment (remaining time until the start of the next special effect, the next special effect (main effect)). Content etc.).

  In this way, the player can know that the current special effect has been canceled by displaying the information related to the next special effect based on the confirmation of the cancellation (cancellation) of the current special effect. As well as being able to learn about special effects that can be executed next. Thereby, it is possible to add the “special effect cancellation function” and the “next special effect information display function” to the gaming machine having the RTC function, thereby improving the convenience of the gaming machine.

  The special effect stop flag turned ON in S6007 is a flag indicating that execution of the special effect is stopped (prohibited), and the special effect is executed (started) when the start time of the special effect is reached. This is referred to (before turning on the special effect execution flag) (see FIGS. 55 and 61). When the special effect start time is reached (YES in S5002), if the special effect stop flag is ON, the special effect is not started (the special effect start command is not set). Then, the process related to the start of the special effect (the special effect related process) is finished. As a result, the special performance scheduled to be executed this time is not executed. The special effect stop flag is turned OFF when the special effect start time is reached, but the special effect is not started (executed).

  Next, the reception period flag turned on in S6003 is turned off (S6009), a selection screen display end command is set in the sub output buffer (S6010), and the process is terminated. When the selection screen display end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 deletes the selection screen that has been displayed so far. Thereby, the player can recognize the end of the reception period.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment described above, the player operates the operation lever through the selection screen displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) during the reception period that occurs within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect. By performing the selection operation (input by the input means), it is possible to arbitrarily stop the execution before starting the execution of the special effect. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having an RTC function by adding a special effect cancellation function that is periodically executed based on the result of timing by the RTC 92.

  In addition, in Example 3 described above, when the special effect canceling function according to Example 4 is added, if the execution is stopped before the execution of the special effect, the predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect The execution of the aforementioned third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) that may be executed at the end of the preceding effect in the third embodiment is also stopped. Thereby, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the production according to the player's preference.

  Here, in the normal production period outside the execution period of the special production (RTC production), as described above, information on the special production (main production) executed in the next cycle (also referred to as “next special production information”). Is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. That is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started) and the content of the next special effect (main effect) are displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub-liquid crystal. The next special effect information is displayed until the main effect constituting the special effect is executed (started) in principle. However, depending on the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the normal effect period (including the effect mode of the notice effect if accompanied by the execution of the notice effect), the display content (display of the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a)) Aspect) may change.

  Specifically, according to the effect mode of the change effect (and / or the notice effect), the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is hidden and the effect image related to the change effect is displayed there. In some cases, an effect image related to the variation effect may be displayed in a superimposed manner on the near side of the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). For example, when executing a variation effect, an effect image with a sense of unity (also referred to as an “integrated effect image”) is displayed using the entire screen of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the left and right sub-liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a). In this case, the next special effect information (pre-start image) displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) before the display of the integrated effect image is hidden, and the integrated effect image is displayed on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal. Display on the sub LCD. Further, while displaying the main effect image (effect design, effect hold image, background image, etc.) related to the change effect on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), the notice image related to the change is displayed on the right sub-liquid crystal (display screen 72a). In this case, the preview image is displayed over the next special effect information (pre-start image) displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) from the start of display of the preview image. In this way, by changing the display content (display mode) of the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) according to the effect mode (effect pattern), it is possible to realize a variety of effect display, which attracts the player's interest. It is possible to enhance the entertainment interest. This also applies to the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set according to the game state as a special symbol (the first to be described later) set in the game state. The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and is synchronized with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the gaming state, thereby synchronizing with the first special symbol. And a case of being synchronized with the second special symbol. Instead of such a mode, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the fluctuation display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is changed to the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one special symbol) set as the main subject of the game in the gaming state is largely displayed (main subject) And the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed small. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Also, not always displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol, but displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol according to the gaming state and the game situation, and the first There may be a case where one of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (the main symbol) is displayed.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine described above, a “variable entrance” that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where the game ball cannot enter, and a state where the game ball cannot enter, “Special game execution means” capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter a ball when the result of the 1-win / no-go determination or the second win-win determination is successful. Further, the “second starter” may be a variable starter that can be changed between the first mode and the second mode in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. In addition, a game state (first game state) in which a game ball enters the variable start port has a predetermined frequency, and a game in which a game ball enters the variable start port is higher than the game state. “Game state setting means” for setting the state (second game state) can be provided. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one. It may be a plurality of times or may have a different number of rounds of opening. In the present embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed simultaneously. However, the second special figure hold is prioritized over the first special figure hold. Also, a so-called special figure 2 priority control process, a control process in which the first special figure hold is prioritized over the second special figure hold, or a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. Also, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Moreover, it has a 1st starting port and a 2nd starting port, and it shall generate | occur | produce the high base state which raises the entrance frequency to the 2nd starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

  In the above-described embodiment, the probability of hitting can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by the non-operation / operation of the probability variation function. Is not limited to this. For example, three or more types of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). Also good. Furthermore, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. A plurality of types of probability conditions that define the relationship between a low probability and a high probability are provided, and any one of the plurality of types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable), for example, when the gaming machine is turned on. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure holding storage unit is read and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined for the prior determination based on the starting entrance. Although (pre-determination) is performed ("starting ball entry process (S205)", see FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-determination method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure holding storage unit, an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on starting entry) to be subjected to prior determination is stored in the main control unit and sub-control. The acquired information stored in the storage area (preliminary determination storage unit) may be determined (preliminary determination). In this case, it is possible to erase the acquisition information (acquisition information stored in another storage area) used for the preliminary determination by storing the result of the preliminary determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit. Or it is good also as what pre-determines about the acquisition information acquired based on starting entrance instead of pre-determining about the acquisition information memorize | stored in the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. That is, it may be determined in advance before the acquired information is stored in the special figure storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquisition information to be subject to prior determination separately from the special figure storage unit, and it is also necessary to read out the acquisition information stored in the special figure storage unit for the preliminary determination. Absent.

  In the embodiment described above, one image display device 7 (board-side display means) is provided as the main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Is provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame side display means) as sub liquid crystal (sub display device), but the sub liquid crystal (sub display device) may be provided on the game board 2 side. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the main liquid crystal (first image display) as a panel display means. Provide one sub liquid crystal on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can do. Alternatively, it is possible to provide one or two or more sub liquid crystals on the game board side while including the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the gaming machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) are all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of the display device is not limited to liquid crystal. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices including a main display device and a sub display device may be mixed. Specifically, for example, of the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiments, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, a variety of effects can be displayed by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the gaming interest.

[Others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification are disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference invention 1)
A conventional gaming machine has a first start port, a second start port, a first grand prize port, and a second grand prize port. When a game ball enters the first start port, the first symbol is variably displayed. 2. When a game ball entered the start opening, there was a display that variably displayed the second symbol. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, either the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening is opened, or the first big prize opening and the second big prize are opened. There has been a gaming machine that executes a jackpot game in which a winning opening is opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

  In addition, in the conventional gaming machine, the second start port is a variable start port, the entry frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the entry frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port and a game aimed at the second starting port in a high base state. In addition, there has been a gaming machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right area of the game area when a big hit game or a high base state is reached. In such a gaming machine, in the low base state, a left-handed game is played, and once the advantageous state is reached, the right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition state of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide highly interesting gaming properties.

  The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and unlike conventional gaming machines, provides a highly interesting gaming state, diversifies the transition state of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. A game machine is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A first starting port through which a game ball can enter,
A second start port that is changeable between a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state;
A third start opening where game balls can enter;
First hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a first hit / no-go judgment based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port;
Second hit / fail judgment execution means for executing a second hit / no-go judgment executed based on a ball entering the third start port;
A first gaming state in which a game ball enters the second starting port at a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which a gaming ball enters the second starting port at a higher frequency than the first gaming state. , A game state setting means capable of setting,
A gaming machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination is a big hit (first specified result), wherein the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second start port and the third start port are provided in the second game area,
In the first game state, a first game (low-low-low base state) is executed by launching a game ball in the first game area and mainly performing the first success / failure determination, and in the second game state, the second game. A second game (low-accuracy base state) in which a game ball is fired in an area and executed mainly as a result of the first success / failure determination; and a game ball is fired in the second game area in the first game state to And a third game (highly accurate and low base state) that is executed mainly by determining whether or not the player is correct.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first start port for executing the first winning / failing determination is arranged in the first gaming area, and the first winning / failing determination is executed in the second gaming area (the first state and the second state). A variable type second start port and a third start port for executing the second determination of whether or not it is present. In addition, the gaming state includes a first gaming state in which the frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port is low (a predetermined frequency) and a frequency of entering game balls into the second starting port than in the first gaming state. A high second gaming state. In the first gaming state, the first game that fires aiming at the first starting port of the first gaming area and executes the first winning / nothing determination as a main subject, and the second starting port of the second gaming area in the second gaming state The first game that fires aiming at the first game and executes the first hit / fail judgment as the subject, and the first game that launches aiming at the third start port of the second game area and executes the second hit / fail judgment as the subject 1 game.

  Thereby, the player can perform the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and can enhance the game interest by changing the various game states and the new game characteristics. It becomes possible. In the first gaming state, the frequency of entering the first game area and entering the first starting port is higher than the frequency of entering the second starting area and launching into the second starting area. May be higher.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1.
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the first game for firing a game ball in the first game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the first success / failure determination in the second game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a first big hit and a second big hit,
As a result of the second success / failure determination in the third game for firing a game ball in the second game area, the game has a third big hit and a fourth big hit,
In the first game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big win. age,
In the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result of the second success / failure determination is the fourth big win. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a gaming machine, the result of the first winning / failing determination in the first game for launching the game ball in the first gaming area and the first winning / failing determination in the second game for firing the game ball in the second gaming area. As a result, there are a first big hit and a second big hit, and there are a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment in the third game in which a game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit is reached. Also, when the second game is reached, the second game can be executed when the result of the first winning / failing determination in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the second big hit is reached. Also, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second winning / failing determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the fourth big hit.

  Thus, regardless of whether the first big hit or the second big hit is caused by the first game after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing the game ball to the second game area. In addition, while performing a game to be launched into the second game area, whether the second game or the third game is performed, a game that performs the first determination (second game), 2. It is possible to play a game while changing the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) in which the determination of success / failure is made. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest through various game state transition modes and novel gaming characteristics.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 1-2,
In the second game, the second game state is changed to the first game state based on execution of the first success / failure determination a specific number of times, and the first game is shifted to the first game. .

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that, in the second game, when the first winning / failing determination is executed a specific number of times, the second gaming state is changed to the first gaming state and the first game is entered. As a result, the game is shifted from the second game to the first game by executing a specific number of determinations. Further, in a game in which the same first win / fail determination is performed, the game is shifted from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the gaming interest through various game state transition modes and novel gaming characteristics.

  Note that the third game may continue the third game even when the second success / failure determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, the third game may be continued until the second winning / failing determination result is a big hit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is a gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3,
As a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit (second specific result), and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of gaming profit can be obtained,
The second success / failure determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first success / failure determination,
In the second game, the execution rate of the first success / failure determination is higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that in the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game because the game profit can be obtained by the small hit.

  According to such a gaming machine, as a result of the second success / failure determination, there is a small hit that can acquire a predetermined amount of gaming profit, and the second success / failure determination is smaller with a higher probability than the first success / failure determination. It will be a hit. That is, the third game is a small hit with a higher probability than the first game and the second game. In addition, the second game that is in the second gaming state has a higher execution frequency of the first winning / failing determination than the first game that is in the first gaming state. In the second game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the decrease rate of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. Thus, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. This also makes it possible to diversify the transition modes between various gaming states having different degrees of advantage, and to enhance the gaming interest with new gaming characteristics. In addition, it is good also as what has a small hit as a result of a 2nd success / failure determination, and does not have a small hit as a result of a 1st success / failure determination.

  Moreover, you may have the 4th game (highly accurate high base state) which discharge | releases a game ball | bowl to a 2nd game area | region in the 2nd game state, and performs it by making a 1st winning / failing determination main. Also, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Also, in the fourth game, the frequency of the first success / failure determination is made higher than that in the first game, so that the decrease rate of the game medium is slower than that in the first game. By making it possible to obtain a profit, the decrease rate of the game medium may be slower than those of the second game and the fourth game. In addition, since the second game and the fourth game are both in the second game state, the decrease rate of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big winning in the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first winning / failing determination becomes the second big hit ( When the 15R first big hit and the 4R second big hit in the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and the first determination result is the fifth big hit (corresponding to the 4R third big hit in the first embodiment). The fourth game can be executed,
In the second game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. Making the game viable,
In the third game, when the result of the second win / fail decision is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R seventh big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second win / fail decision is the fourth big win (the embodiment) 1) (corresponding to 15R 5th big hit of 1), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the second hit / fail judgment becomes 6th big hit (corresponding to 2R 6th big hit of the first embodiment), the fourth game can be executed ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of the first embodiment), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first success / failure determination becomes the second big hit (Example) 1 is equivalent to 15R first jackpot and 4R second jackpot), the third game can be executed, and if the result of the first hit / fail judgment is fifth jackpot (corresponding to 4R third jackpot of Embodiment 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

  The “decreasing speed of the game medium used for the game” is given from the game medium (launched game ball) used in the unit time (for example, 1 minute) or the number of unit shots (for example, 100 shots) during the same period. The number obtained by subtracting game media (paid prize balls) is calculated as the number of game media (game balls) to be reduced. In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is performed for a predetermined period, the decrease rate of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) possessed by the player is in descending order of decrease rate. The first game> the second game (the fourth game)> the third game. In the third game, it can be said that the rate of decrease is negative because the longer the game is continued, the more the ball can be increased by small hits. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state where the game is played while decreasing the number of balls, while the third game is a state where the game is played while increasing the number of balls.

  Further, the type of the big hit (first big hit type) in the case where the result of the first success / failure determination is a big hit is different from the big hit type (second big hit type) in the case where the result of the second positive / failed determination is a big hit. It may be many. In addition, as a third game (highly accurate low base state) generated as a result of the second winning / failing determination, when a third game is obtained through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, a prize ball is obtained. It is assumed that the game becomes the third game after the big hit game that is easy. In addition, as the third game (highly accurate low base state) generated as a result of the first success / failure determination, there is no case of becoming a third game through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. It may be provided only when the third game is achieved through a big hit game that is easy to acquire.

  Further, the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second winning / failing determination is set to be higher than the probability of being a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of occurrence of the small hit in the second winning / notifying determination can be increased. More preferably, the probability of occurrence of small hits in the second determination of success / failure is preferably ½ or more. In addition, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination have the same probability of entry into the high probability state (operation probability of the probability variation function). On the other hand, the first entry / failure determination and the second entry / failure determination may have different rush probabilities for entering the state C (highly accurate low base state), and the state 2 (highly accurate low base state) is determined. The rush probability may be higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for the game to be launched into the second game area where the third game in which the second win / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

  Also, in the second win / fail decision, if a big hit that does not enter the state C (highly accurate low base state) is reached, the big win is the number of winning balls that can be obtained from the big win (big hit game) in the second win / fail decision Is the biggest jackpot (big hit game). The jackpot is a jackpot (big hit game) with the smallest number of winning balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit games) in the first and second hit / fail judgments.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that diversifies the game mode transition mode and enhances the gaming interest.

(Reference invention 2)
In conventional gaming machines, there is a game that makes a determination as to whether or not a game ball has entered a starting port and displays the symbols in a variable manner based on the result of the determination. In such a gaming machine, when the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and when the result of the determination of success / failure is out, there is a case where the symbol is removed and stopped and displayed as a symbol. . In addition, there was a gaming machine having a plurality of special symbols and effect symbols as symbols (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

  In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional gaming machine are both variably displayed and stopped based on the determination result. In addition, the special symbol indicates the result of the success / failure determination by displaying the change without displaying the game effect such as reach change after the change display, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed after performing the game effect such as reach change after the change display. This shows the result of the determination of success / failure. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, display control according to the purpose of each symbol has been made possible.

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the coincidence of both symbols due to the display mode and display position of a plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and facilitates confirmation of a plurality of symbols by a display mode of a plurality of symbols, and provides a fair gaming machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Correct / incorrect determination execution means for executing correct / incorrect determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
A first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) for variably displaying the first identification information (special symbol) on the basis of the determination result,
A second identification information display section (effect design display section 7b) for variably displaying the second identification information (effect design) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A third identification information display unit (variation state indicator 49) for variably displaying the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information;
A game machine comprising special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the determination of success or failure is a specific result,
A first display unit (main display device 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit;
And a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first identification information display unit that variably displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and the second identification information (effect symbol) are variably displayed. A second identification information display unit that displays, a third identification information display unit that variably displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol), and a game effect that is executed in accordance with the variation display of the second identification information. And a game effect display section. In addition, a first display configured to include a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display configured to include a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. And a section.

  Accordingly, it is possible to confirm the second identification information and the game effect indicating the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the go / no-go determination by checking the first display unit. Thus, the first identification information and the third identification information displayed in a variable manner can be confirmed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1,
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a game ball can flow down and playing a game by flowing the game ball into the game area,
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit configured to include the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is disposed outside (outside) the gaming area, and the second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. Accordingly, the second display unit displays the second identification information indicating the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the success / failure determination in the game area, thereby confirming the flow of the game ball and the second display unit. The display mode can be confirmed. In addition, the first display unit that can confirm the first identification information and the third identification information is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game effect or the like. It is possible to reliably grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

  The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that partitions the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that partitions the game area). It is good also as what arranges to.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-2,
The first display unit is composed of an LED, the second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal,
The second display unit is larger than the first display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first display unit is configured by an LED, the second display unit is configured by a liquid crystal, and the second display unit is a larger display unit than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be made simple and the display mode of the first identification information and the third identification information can be reliably grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by being composed of liquid crystal, it is possible to execute various and varied game effects, and enhance the game entertainment.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3,
A main control unit having the success / failure determination execution unit;
A sub-control unit that receives and controls a control signal from the main control unit, and
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is controlled by a main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are sub-control units. The display is controlled.

  According to such a gaming machine, it has a main control unit and a sub-control unit that receives and controls the control signal from the main control unit. In the first display unit, the first identification information display unit is controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is controlled by the sub control unit. The second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is display-controlled by the sub-control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information that is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information that is controlled and displayed by the sub-control unit. Thus, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. This also makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

  The main control unit is a control unit that performs control related to special symbol display control, determination of success / failure, control related to sensor detection, control related to discharge of prize balls, and control related to opening and closing of a variable entrance, and a control unit that controls the game It is. The sub-control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and performs main control related to game effects such as operation control of the movable member and display control play of the effect display unit. This is a control unit that follows the control unit.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
Game information storage means capable of storing predetermined game information;
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
Game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers earlier than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when power supply is started, based on the game information stored and held by the memory holding means, it is provided with game information recovery means for recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected. . When the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit included in the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, thereby enabling display control. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal to diversify the game effects and performs a variety of display controls, so that a certain amount of time is required for the game information restoration work. On the other hand, since the 1st display part (3rd identification information display part) comprised simply by LED performs simple display control, it does not require long time for the recovery | restoration work of game information.

  Thereby, even if it is a display part controlled by the same sub control part, a 3rd identification information display part is restored prior to a 2nd display part, and display control can be performed immediately. As a result, the game can be started immediately after the power supply is started, in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but the second display unit composed of liquid crystal takes time to recover (the game is still restored after the game starts). Not)). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit that has spread quickly and can start display control.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to facilitate the confirmation of a plurality of symbols and to provide a fair gaming machine by the display mode of the plurality of symbols.

(Reference invention 3)
Conventionally, game machines have been provided with production devices such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various productions are executed according to the progress of the game. Some game machines of this type have a function of executing a special effect different from a normal effect accompanying the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like. By installing a plurality of gaming machines having such functions side by side on an island facility in the gaming hall, special effects by the plurality of gaming machines can be simultaneously executed at a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -Ref. -180295.

  However, the function of executing a special effect every predetermined time is already well known, and merely having the function is insufficient to improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
Identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display section in a predetermined cycle;
Production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production execution means
The suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result can be executed,
The suggestive effect can be executed in different modes when the special effect period has not occurred and when the special effect period has occurred.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special production period that can occur at a predetermined cycle does not occur (during a period other than the special production period) and when it occurs (during the special production period), the specific display The suggestion effect that suggests the possibility of deriving the result (degree of expectation) can be executed in different modes. For this reason, it is suitable for each of the normal production period and the special production period, such as different periods of the suggested production (production contents) between the special production period (hereinafter also referred to as “normal production period”) and the special production period. For example, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect in the form (effect content). As a result, it is possible to enhance the effects of both the special effect period (display of the special effect image) and the suggestion effect, thereby improving the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 described above.
The suggestion effect is an image that can be changed in display mode, and is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting the level of the possibility on a predetermined display unit according to the display mode,
The production execution means
When performing the suggestion effect when the special effect period has not occurred, a first suggestion image is displayed on the first display unit as the suggestion image,
When executing the suggestion effect when the special effect period is occurring, the second suggestion image different from the first suggestion image is used as the suggestion image on the second display unit different from the first display unit. It is characterized by being displayed smaller than one suggestion image.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the suggestion effect is executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion image whose display mode can be changed is displayed on the first display unit. The On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special effect period, the suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion image whose display mode can be changed is displayed on the second display unit different from the first display unit, In this case, the second suggestion image is displayed smaller than the first suggestion image. For this reason, in the suggestion effect executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion image (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently to make the player pay attention to the display mode (the suggestion effect), while during the special effect period In the suggestion effect to be executed, the suggestion image (second suggestion image) is displayed conservatively so as not to impair the effect of the special effect image, and suggests the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Is possible. Thereby, it is possible to make a suggestion effect of an impression different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and it is possible to attract the player's interest to the difference.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-2 described above.
The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
When the suggestion effect is executed and the high expectation effect is executed after the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestion image displayed in the suggestion effect is a predetermined display mode. The high expectation degree effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the change to
A timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on a predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the predetermined display mode. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute a high expectation effect that suggests that the display result of the variation display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result, and the suggestion effect during the normal effect period When the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the predetermined display mode, the high expectation effect is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the change. Then, a timer image indicating the passage of the predetermined time is displayed on the predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the predetermined display mode. For this reason, in the normal performance period, first, the player is focused on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed. When the suggestion effect is executed, the player is displayed in the display mode of the first suggestion image in the suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes a predetermined display mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timer image indicating the remaining time until the high expectation effect is executed. . As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation of the player who is waiting for the execution (occurrence) of the high expectation effect, and improve the game entertainment when the special effect period is not occurring (during the normal effect period). It becomes possible.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above,
The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
When the high expectation effect is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed prior to the execution.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a high expectation effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variation display of the identification information is likely to be the specific display result, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution. It is possible. For this reason, it becomes possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the execution (occurrence) of the subsequent high expectation effect by executing the suggestion effect. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above.
The effect execution means is capable of executing the high expectation effect in the same manner when the special effect period has not occurred and when the special effect period has occurred. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high expectation degree effect can be executed in the same manner in the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, it becomes possible to make a high expectation degree effect into the same aspect (effect content) irrespective of whether the special effect period has occurred. Thereby, it is possible to make the high expectation level effect common and to make the effect easy to understand for the player.

The gaming machine of reference invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above.
The effect execution means can execute the high expectation effect in different modes when the special effect period does not occur and when the special effect period occurs. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the high expectation degree effect can be executed in a different manner between the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, it is possible to execute a high expectation degree effect in a mode (effect content) suitable for each of the normal effect period and the special effect period. As a result, it is possible to differentiate high expectation performance and attract the player's interest to the difference.

  According to the present reference invention 3 described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

(Reference invention 4)
Conventionally, game machines have been provided with production devices such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various productions are executed according to the progress of the game. Some game machines of this type have a function of executing a special effect different from a normal effect accompanying the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like. By installing a plurality of gaming machines having such functions side by side on an island facility in the gaming hall, special effects by the plurality of gaming machines can be simultaneously executed at a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -Ref. -180295.

  However, there is still room for improvement for a gaming machine having a function of executing a special performance every predetermined time.

  The present invention 4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
In a gaming machine that plays a game using a predetermined game medium,
An input means for the player to input,
A time measuring means capable of measuring time;
Production control means capable of controlling the production,
The production control means includes
A special effect can be executed based on the result of the time measurement by the time measuring means,
Within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect, generate a reception period for receiving input by the input means,
The execution of the special effect can be stopped based on the input by the input means during the reception period.

  According to such a gaming machine, the reception period for accepting input by the input means occurs within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect that can be executed based on the result of the time measurement by the time measurement means. The execution of the special effect can be stopped based on the input by the input means. For this reason, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution before starting the execution of the special effect by performing input using the input means during the reception period. Thereby, it becomes possible to add a special effect canceling function based on the timing result and improve the convenience.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1 described above.
The production control means includes
In the reception period, a selection image that prompts the player to make a selection related to execution or non-execution of the special effect is displayed on a predetermined selection image display unit,
When the result of the input by the input means during the reception period is a selection result indicating that the special effect is not executed, the execution of the special effect is stopped.

  According to such a gaming machine, the selection image is displayed in the reception period before the start of the special effect, and the result of the input performed during the reception period is the selection result that the special effect is not executed. In such a case, the execution of the special effect is stopped. For this reason, the player can make a selection related to execution or non-execution of the special effect by using the input means while viewing the selection image displayed in the reception period. Accordingly, it is possible to cause the player to recognize the occurrence of the reception period through the display of the selection image and to make the player perform selection related to execution or non-execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1 or 4-2 described above.
When the execution of the special effect is stopped, the effect control means displays information on the special effect that is executed based on a result of the next time measurement on a predetermined information display unit. .

  According to such a gaming machine, when the execution of the special effect is stopped based on the input by the input means, information regarding the special effect that is executed based on the result of the next time measurement is displayed. For this reason, the player can know the special effects that can be executed next, as well as the execution of the special effects this time, by viewing the display of information on the next special effects. Accordingly, it is possible to improve convenience by adding an information display (notification) function regarding a special effect scheduled to be executed next time together with a cancel function of the special effect scheduled to be executed this time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above,
First image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized at substantially the center of the game area formed on the game board;
A second image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized at a location deviated from the center of the game area;
Game state control means capable of making the gaming state a special gaming state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and
The special effect is executed by displaying a predetermined special effect image,
The production control means includes
While displaying a predetermined effect image on the first image display means in the special gaming state,
When executing the special effect in the special gaming state, the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means,
When the special effect is executed when not in the special gaming state, the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first image display means provided so that the display contents can be visually recognized at the approximate center of the game area, and the display contents can be visually recognized at a place off the center of the game area. Second image display means provided as described above, and in the special game state, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the first image display means (also referred to as main display means) and the special game When the special effect is executed in the state, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the second image display means. On the other hand, when the special effect is executed when not in the special gaming state, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the first image display means. For this reason, the display location of the special effect image becomes the first image display means or the second image depending on whether or not the game situation when the special effect is executed based on the timing result is the special game state. It becomes a display means. This makes it possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-4 described above.
The special effect image displayed on the second image display means is smaller in display size than the special effect image displayed on the first image display means.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means, the special effect image has a display size as compared with the case where the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means. It is supposed to be small. For this reason, when the special effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed small on the second image display means. Thereby, even if the special effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the special effect image can be displayed without hindering the visibility of the image for the special game.

  According to the reference invention 4 described above, it is possible to improve the convenience of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

(Reference invention 5)
Conventionally, game machines have been provided with production devices such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various productions are executed according to the progress of the game. Some game machines of this type have a function of executing a special effect different from a normal effect accompanying the progress of the game every time a predetermined time is measured using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like. By installing a plurality of gaming machines having such functions side by side on an island facility in the gaming hall, special effects by the plurality of gaming machines can be simultaneously executed at a predetermined period (for example, JP-A-2014 2014). -Ref. -180295.

  However, the function of executing a special effect every predetermined time is already well known, and merely having the function is insufficient to improve the game entertainment.

  The present invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing acquisition information acquired based on the game ball entering the start port;
Determination means for determining the acquired information;
Identification information display means for performing variable display of identification information based on the result of the determination;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to a player based on the display result of the variable display being a specific display result;
A time measuring means capable of measuring time;
Production execution means capable of performing the production,
The production execution means
A special production comprising a main production and a pre-production produced prior to the main production;
A specific suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, and
While performing the special effect based on the result of the time measured by the time measuring means,
The specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, based on the fact that the acquisition information having the display result of the variable display as the specific display result is stored. It is characterized by the existence of

  According to such a gaming machine, the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the determination result of the acquired information acquired by entering the game ball into the starting port, and the display result of the variation display is the specific display result. Then, it becomes possible to execute a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player. Based on these games, special effects and specific suggestion effects can be executed. The special effect includes a main effect and a preceding effect that is performed prior to the main effect, and can be executed based on the result of timing by the time measuring means. The specific suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the specific display result. In executing the special effect, the specific suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect). The acquisition information having the display result as the specific display result is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. For this reason, when the specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestion effect is stored as acquisition information that is a trigger for deriving the specific display result (special game execution opportunity). It will function as an effect to give notice of what is being done. Thereby, when a special effect is executed based on the result of timing by the time measuring means, the player is caused to pay attention to whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed before the start of the main effect related to the special effect. It is possible to improve interest.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1, which is described above.
A gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state after the special game;
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the first gaming state,
The specific display result includes a first specific display result in which the gaming state after the special game is the first gaming state, and a second specific display in which the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state. There is a result,
The effect execution means is based on the fact that acquisition information that stores the display result of the variable display as the two specific display results is stored at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect. It is characterized in that a specific suggestion effect may be executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the gaming state after the special game based on this becomes the first gaming state, and the second specific display result In this case, the gaming state after the special game based on this becomes a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. In executing the special effect, the specific suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect). The acquisition information whose second display result is the display result is stored in the acquisition information storage means. For this reason, when the specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestion effect is stored as acquisition information that triggers a transition to the relatively advantageous second gaming state. It will be a notice of what has been done. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree with respect to the execution of the specific suggestion effect when the special effect is executed based on the result of the time measurement by the time measuring means.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 or 5-2 described above.
The effect execution means may execute the specific suggestion effect when the preceding effect ends.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the special effect is executed based on the result of timing by the time measuring means, the specific suggestion effect can be executed when the preceding effect related to the special effect ends. For this reason, it becomes possible to make the player recognize the end timing of the preceding effect as the execution timing of the specific suggestion effect. Thereby, it is possible to enhance the interest when the preceding effect related to the special effect ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 described above,
The preceding effect is a countdown effect that counts down until the main effect is started.

  According to such a gaming machine, when a special effect is executed based on the result of timing by the time measuring means, the countdown effect that counts down until the main effect related to the special effect is started is executed as the preceding effect. Is done. For this reason, the countdown effect (countdown display) executed prior to the main effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect starts (in other words, until the preceding effect ends), and is specified in this period. If the suggestion effect has not yet been executed, the remaining period until the period during which the specific suggestion effect is likely to be executed is indicated. Furthermore, when the specific suggestion effect is executed when the preceding effect ends, the remaining period until the specific suggestion effect is executed is shown. Thereby, it becomes possible to enhance the interest in the period from the start of the special effect to the start of the main effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 described above,
An input means for the player to input,
The effect execution means can stop the execution of the special effect based on an input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect.

  According to such a gaming machine, the execution of the special effect can be stopped based on the input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect. For this reason, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect by performing input using the input means. If the execution of the special effect is stopped, the player can change the display accordingly. The execution of the specific suggestion effect based on the storage of the acquired information having the display result as the specific display result is also stopped. Thereby, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the production according to the player's preference.

  According to the reference invention 5 described above, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect every predetermined time.

  Two or more arbitrary inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 5 described above may be combined.

  1 Pachinko machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (first area), 3B right game area (second area), 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 8 production symbols, 20 first start Mouth, 21 2nd start opening, 26 3rd start opening, 28 gate, 30 1st grand prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display section), 41b 2nd Special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 71 Second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 Third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 Main control board (main control unit), 90 Sub control board ( Sub-control unit), 92 RTC (time measuring means), 100 image control board (image control unit).

Claims (6)

Identification information display means capable of displaying identification information;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that can give a predetermined game profit to the player based on the display result of the variation display of the identification information being a specific display result;
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display section in a predetermined cycle;
Production execution means capable of executing a predetermined production,
The production execution means
The suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result can be executed,
The suggestion effect can be executed in different modes when the special effect period has not occurred and when the special effect period has occurred. The suggestion effect is an image that can be changed in display mode, and is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting the level of the possibility on a predetermined display unit according to the display mode,
The production execution means
When performing the suggestion effect when the special effect period has not occurred, a first suggestion image is displayed on the first display unit as the suggestion image,
When executing the suggestion effect when the special effect period is occurring, the second suggestion image different from the first suggestion image is used as the suggestion image on the second display unit different from the first display unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed smaller than one suggestion image. The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
When the suggestion effect is executed and the high expectation effect is executed after the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestion image displayed in the suggestion effect is a predetermined display mode. The high expectation degree effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the change to
A timer image indicating the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on a predetermined display unit until the predetermined time elapses after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the predetermined display mode. The gaming machine according to claim 2. The production execution means
It is possible to execute a high expectation degree suggesting that the possibility is high,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the high expectation effect is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed prior to the execution. The said effect execution means can perform the said high expectation degree effect in the same aspect, when the said special effect period has not generate | occur | produced and when the said special effect period has generate | occur | produced. Item 5. A gaming machine according to item 3 or 4. The said effect execution means can perform the said high expectation degree effect in a different aspect, when the said special effect period has not generate | occur | produced and when the said special effect period has generate | occur | produced. Item 5. A gaming machine according to item 3 or 4.

Images